1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2 % 3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5 % 6 \def\texinfoversion{2013-02-01.11} 7 % 8 % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10 % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 11 % 12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 14 % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 15 % License, or (at your option) any later version. 16 % 17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 20 % General Public License for more details. 21 % 22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 23 % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 24 % 25 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 26 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 27 % restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 28 % of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 29 % 30 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 31 % reports; you can get the latest version from: 32 % http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 33 % http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 34 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 35 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 36 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 37 % 38 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo (a] gnu.org. Please include including a 39 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 40 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 41 % 42 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 43 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 44 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 45 % tex foo.texi 46 % texindex foo.?? 47 % tex foo.texi 48 % tex foo.texi 49 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 50 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 51 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 52 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 53 % 54 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 55 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 56 % full Texinfo distribution. 57 % 58 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 59 60 61 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 62 63 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number 64 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 65 % they might have appeared in the input file name. 66 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 67 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 68 69 \chardef\other=12 70 71 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 72 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 73 \let\+ = \relax 74 75 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 76 \let\ptexb=\b 77 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet 78 \let\ptexc=\c 79 \let\ptexcomma=\, 80 \let\ptexdot=\. 81 \let\ptexdots=\dots 82 \let\ptexend=\end 83 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv 84 \let\ptexexclam=\! 85 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 86 \let\ptexgtr=> 87 \let\ptexhat=^ 88 \let\ptexi=\i 89 \let\ptexindent=\indent 90 \let\ptexinsert=\insert 91 \let\ptexlbrace=\{ 92 \let\ptexless=< 93 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 94 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 95 \let\ptexplus=+ 96 \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 97 \let\ptexrbrace=\} 98 \let\ptexslash=\/ 99 \let\ptexstar=\* 100 \let\ptext=\t 101 \let\ptextop=\top 102 {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 103 104 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 105 % starts a new line in the output. 106 \newlinechar = `^^J 107 108 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 109 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 110 % 111 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 112 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 113 \else 114 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 115 \fi 116 117 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 118 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 119 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 120 \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 121 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 122 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 123 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 124 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 125 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 126 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 127 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 128 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 129 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 130 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 131 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 132 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 133 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 134 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 135 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 136 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 137 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 138 % 139 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 140 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 141 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 142 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 143 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 144 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 145 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 146 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 147 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 148 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 149 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 150 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 151 % 152 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 153 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 154 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 155 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 156 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 157 158 % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. 159 \chardef\spacecat = 10 160 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} 161 162 % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. 163 \chardef\ampChar = `\& 164 \chardef\colonChar = `\: 165 \chardef\commaChar = `\, 166 \chardef\dashChar = `\- 167 \chardef\dotChar = `\. 168 \chardef\exclamChar= `\! 169 \chardef\hashChar = `\# 170 \chardef\lquoteChar= `\` 171 \chardef\questChar = `\? 172 \chardef\rquoteChar= `\' 173 \chardef\semiChar = `\; 174 \chardef\slashChar = `\/ 175 \chardef\underChar = `\_ 176 177 % Ignore a token. 178 % 179 \def\gobble#1{} 180 181 % The following is used inside several \edef's. 182 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 183 184 % Hyphenation fixes. 185 \hyphenation{ 186 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 187 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 188 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 189 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 190 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 191 spell-ing spell-ings 192 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 193 wide-spread wrap-around 194 } 195 196 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 197 \newdimen\bindingoffset 198 \newdimen\normaloffset 199 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight 200 201 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles 202 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 203 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 204 % 205 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 206 207 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 208 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 209 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 210 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 211 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 212 % 213 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 214 \def\loggingall{% 215 \tracingstats2 216 \tracingpages1 217 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 218 \tracingparagraphs1 219 \tracingoutput1 220 \tracingmacros2 221 \tracingrestores1 222 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 223 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 224 \tracingscantokens1 225 \tracingifs1 226 \tracinggroups1 227 \tracingnesting2 228 \tracingassigns1 229 \fi 230 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 231 \errorcontextlines16 232 }% 233 234 % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 235 % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 236 % after all. 237 % 238 \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 239 \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 240 241 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 242 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 243 % 244 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 245 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 246 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 247 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 248 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 249 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 250 251 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 252 % 253 \newif\ifcropmarks 254 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 255 % 256 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 257 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 258 % 259 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 260 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 261 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 262 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 263 264 % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 265 % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 266 % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 267 % 268 % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 269 % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 270 % 271 % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 272 % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 273 % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is 274 % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two 275 % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and 276 % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... 277 \def\domark{% 278 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 279 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 280 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 281 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 282 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 283 \mark{% 284 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 285 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 286 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 287 }% 288 } 289 % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 290 % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 291 % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 292 % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 293 % first @chapter. 294 \def\gettopheadingmarks{% 295 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 296 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 297 } 298 \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 299 \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 300 301 % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 302 \def\lastchapterdefs{} 303 \def\lastsectiondefs{} 304 \def\prevchapterdefs{} 305 \def\prevsectiondefs{} 306 \def\lastcolordefs{} 307 308 % Main output routine. 309 \chardef\PAGE = 255 310 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 311 312 \newbox\headlinebox 313 \newbox\footlinebox 314 315 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents 316 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. 317 \def\onepageout#1{% 318 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 319 % 320 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 321 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 322 % 323 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 324 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 325 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 326 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% 327 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 328 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% 329 % 330 {% 331 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 332 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 333 % before the \shipout runs. 334 % 335 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 336 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 337 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 338 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 339 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 340 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 341 % it needs to be 342 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} 343 \shipout\vbox{% 344 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 345 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 346 % 347 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 348 \hsize = \outerhsize 349 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 350 \vtop to0pt{% 351 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 352 \nointerlineskip 353 \line{% 354 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 355 \hfill 356 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 357 }% 358 \vss}% 359 \vskip\topandbottommargin 360 \line\bgroup 361 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 362 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 363 \vbox\bgroup 364 \fi 365 % 366 \unvbox\headlinebox 367 \pagebody{#1}% 368 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 369 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 370 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 371 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 372 \vskip 24pt 373 \unvbox\footlinebox 374 \fi 375 % 376 \ifcropmarks 377 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 378 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 379 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 380 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 381 \vbox to0pt{\vss 382 \line{% 383 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 384 \hfill 385 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 386 }% 387 \nointerlineskip 388 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 389 }% 390 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 391 \fi 392 }% end of \shipout\vbox 393 }% end of group with \indexdummies 394 \advancepageno 395 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 396 } 397 398 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 399 400 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 401 {\catcode`\@ =11 402 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 403 % marginal hacks, juha (a] viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 404 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 405 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 406 \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 407 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 408 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 409 } 410 411 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 412 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 413 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 414 % 415 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 416 \def\nstop{\vbox 417 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 418 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 419 \def\nsbot{\vbox 420 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 421 422 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 423 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 424 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 425 % 426 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 427 \def\parseargusing#1#2{% 428 \def\argtorun{#2}% 429 \begingroup 430 \obeylines 431 \spaceisspace 432 #1% 433 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 434 } 435 436 {\obeylines % 437 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 438 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 439 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 440 }% 441 } 442 443 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. 444 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 445 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 446 447 % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 448 % 449 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 450 % @end itemize @c foo 451 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 452 % by \finishparsearg. 453 % 454 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 455 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 456 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 457 \def\temp{#3}% 458 \ifx\temp\empty 459 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 460 \let\temp\finishparsearg 461 \else 462 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 463 \fi 464 % Put the space token in: 465 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 466 } 467 468 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 469 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 470 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 471 % just before passing the control to \argtorun. 472 % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 473 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 474 % that a pair of braces would be stripped. 475 % 476 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 477 % 478 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 479 480 % \parseargdef\foo{...} 481 % is roughly equivalent to 482 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 483 % \def\Xfoo#1{...} 484 % 485 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my 486 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 487 488 \def\parseargdef#1{% 489 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 490 } 491 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 492 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 493 \def#1##1% 494 } 495 496 % Several utility definitions with active space: 497 { 498 \obeyspaces 499 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 500 501 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 502 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 503 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 504 % should produce a line of output anyway. 505 % 506 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 507 508 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 509 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 510 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 511 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 512 } 513 514 515 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 516 517 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 518 % 519 % \envdef\foo{...} 520 % \def\Efoo{...} 521 % 522 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 523 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 524 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 525 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 526 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 527 % 528 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 529 % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 530 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 531 % special case.) 532 533 534 % At run-time, environments start with this: 535 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 536 % initialize 537 \let\thisenv\empty 538 539 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 540 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 541 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 542 543 % Check whether we're in the right environment: 544 \def\checkenv#1{% 545 \def\temp{#1}% 546 \ifx\thisenv\temp 547 \else 548 \badenverr 549 \fi 550 } 551 552 % Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 553 \def\badenverr{% 554 \errhelp = \EMsimple 555 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 556 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 557 } 558 \def\inenvironment#1{% 559 \ifx#1\empty 560 outside of any environment% 561 \else 562 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 563 \fi 564 } 565 566 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 567 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 568 % 569 \parseargdef\end{% 570 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 571 \else 572 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 573 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 574 \csname E#1\endcsname 575 \endgroup 576 \fi 577 } 578 579 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 580 581 582 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 583 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 584 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 585 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 586 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 587 {\catcode`@ = 11 588 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 589 % if the definition is written into an index file. 590 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 591 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 592 } 593 594 % @: forces normal size whitespace following. 595 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 596 597 % @* forces a line break. 598 \def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 599 600 % @/ allows a line break. 601 \let\/=\allowbreak 602 603 % @. is an end-of-sentence period. 604 \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 605 606 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 607 \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 608 609 % @? is an end-of-sentence query. 610 \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 611 612 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 613 % 614 \def\onword{on} 615 \def\offword{off} 616 % 617 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 618 \def\temp{#1}% 619 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 620 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 621 \else 622 \errhelp = \EMsimple 623 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 624 \fi\fi 625 } 626 627 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 628 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 629 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 630 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 631 632 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 633 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 634 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 635 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 636 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 637 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 638 % the text is small, which looks bad. 639 % 640 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 641 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 642 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 643 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 644 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 645 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 646 % 647 \newbox\groupbox 648 \def\vfilllimit{0.7} 649 % 650 \envdef\group{% 651 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 652 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 653 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 654 \fi 655 \startsavinginserts 656 % 657 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 658 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 659 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 660 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 661 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 662 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 663 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 664 \comment 665 } 666 % 667 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 668 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 669 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 670 % above. But it's pretty close. 671 \def\Egroup{% 672 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 673 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 674 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 675 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 676 \egroup % End the \vtop. 677 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 678 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 679 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 680 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 681 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 682 % group, force a page break. 683 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 684 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight 685 \page 686 \fi 687 \fi 688 \box\groupbox 689 \prevdepth = \dimen1 690 \checkinserts 691 } 692 % 693 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 694 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 695 % 696 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 697 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 698 where each line of input produces a line of output.} 699 700 % @need space-in-mils 701 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 702 703 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 704 705 \parseargdef\need{% 706 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 707 % paragraph. 708 \par 709 % 710 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 711 \dimen0 = #1\mil 712 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 713 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 714 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 715 % 716 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 717 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 718 % And a page break here is fine. 719 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 720 % 721 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 722 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 723 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 724 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 725 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 726 % 727 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 728 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 729 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 730 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 731 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 732 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 733 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 734 \penalty9999 735 % 736 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 737 \kern -#1\mil 738 % 739 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 740 \nobreak 741 \fi 742 } 743 744 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 745 746 \let\br = \par 747 748 % @page forces the start of a new page. 749 % 750 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 751 752 % @exdent text.... 753 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 754 755 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 756 % That's how much \exdent should take out. 757 \newskip\exdentamount 758 759 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 760 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 761 762 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 763 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 764 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 765 766 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 767 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 768 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 769 % 770 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 771 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 772 % 773 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 774 \nobreak 775 \kern-\strutdepth 776 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 777 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 778 \vss 779 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 780 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 781 \ifx#1l% 782 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 783 \else 784 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 785 \fi 786 \null 787 }% 788 }} 789 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 790 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 791 % 792 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 793 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 794 % else use TEXT for both). 795 % 796 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 797 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 798 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 799 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 800 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 801 \def\righttext{#2}% 802 \else 803 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 804 \def\righttext{#1}% 805 \fi 806 % 807 \ifodd\pageno 808 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 809 \else 810 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 811 \fi 812 \temp 813 } 814 815 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should 816 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the 817 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would 818 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main 819 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command 820 % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work. 821 % 822 \def\|{% 823 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. 824 \leavevmode 825 % 826 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. 827 \vadjust{% 828 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current 829 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. 830 \vskip-\baselineskip 831 % 832 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So 833 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. 834 \llap{% 835 % 836 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. 837 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt 838 % 839 % This is the space between the bar and the text. 840 \hskip 12pt 841 }% 842 }% 843 } 844 845 % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 846 % 847 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 848 \def\includezzz#1{% 849 \pushthisfilestack 850 \def\thisfile{#1}% 851 {% 852 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 853 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 854 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 855 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 856 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 857 % 858 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 859 % definitions, etc. 860 \expandafter 861 }\temp 862 \popthisfilestack 863 } 864 \def\filenamecatcodes{% 865 \catcode`\\=\other 866 \catcode`~=\other 867 \catcode`^=\other 868 \catcode`_=\other 869 \catcode`|=\other 870 \catcode`<=\other 871 \catcode`>=\other 872 \catcode`+=\other 873 \catcode`-=\other 874 \catcode`\`=\other 875 \catcode`\'=\other 876 } 877 878 \def\pushthisfilestack{% 879 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 880 } 881 \def\pushthisfilestackX{% 882 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 883 } 884 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 885 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 886 } 887 888 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 889 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 890 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 891 % 892 \def\thisfile{} 893 894 % @center line 895 % outputs that line, centered. 896 % 897 \parseargdef\center{% 898 \ifhmode 899 \let\centersub\centerH 900 \else 901 \let\centersub\centerV 902 \fi 903 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 904 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 905 } 906 \def\centerH#1{{% 907 \hfil\break 908 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 909 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 910 \line{#1}% 911 \break 912 }} 913 % 914 \newcount\centerpenalty 915 \def\centerV#1{% 916 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 917 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 918 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 919 % prevent a page break here. 920 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 921 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 922 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 923 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 924 } 925 926 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 927 % 928 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 929 930 % @comment ...line which is ignored... 931 % @c is the same as @comment 932 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 933 % 934 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% 935 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 936 \commentxxx} 937 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 938 % 939 \let\c=\comment 940 941 % @paragraphindent NCHARS 942 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 943 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 944 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 945 % 946 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 947 \def\noneword{none} 948 % 949 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 950 \def\temp{#1}% 951 \ifx\temp\asisword 952 \else 953 \ifx\temp\noneword 954 \defaultparindent = 0pt 955 \else 956 \defaultparindent = #1em 957 \fi 958 \fi 959 \parindent = \defaultparindent 960 } 961 962 % @exampleindent NCHARS 963 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 964 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 965 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 966 \parseargdef\exampleindent{% 967 \def\temp{#1}% 968 \ifx\temp\asisword 969 \else 970 \ifx\temp\noneword 971 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 972 \else 973 \lispnarrowing = #1em 974 \fi 975 \fi 976 } 977 978 % @firstparagraphindent WORD 979 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 980 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 981 % paragraphs. 982 % 983 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 984 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 985 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 986 % By default, we suppress indentation. 987 % 988 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 989 \def\insertword{insert} 990 % 991 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 992 \def\temp{#1}% 993 \ifx\temp\noneword 994 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 995 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 996 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 997 \else 998 \errhelp = \EMsimple 999 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1000 \fi\fi 1001 } 1002 1003 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1004 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1005 % 1006 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1007 % paragraph. 1008 % 1009 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1010 \gdef\indent{% 1011 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1012 \indent 1013 }% 1014 \gdef\noindent{% 1015 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1016 \noindent 1017 }% 1018 \global\everypar = {% 1019 \kern -\parindent 1020 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1021 }% 1022 } 1023 1024 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1025 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent 1026 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent 1027 \global \everypar = {}% 1028 } 1029 1030 1031 % @refill is a no-op. 1032 \let\refill=\relax 1033 1034 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 1035 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 1036 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). 1037 % 1038 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 1039 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse 1040 1041 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. 1042 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. 1043 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. 1044 \def\setfilename{% 1045 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. 1046 \iflinks 1047 \tryauxfile 1048 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 1049 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 1050 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. 1051 \openindices 1052 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. 1053 % 1054 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 1055 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. 1056 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf 1057 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi 1058 \closein 1 1059 % 1060 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. 1061 } 1062 1063 % Called from \setfilename. 1064 % 1065 \def\openindices{% 1066 \newindex{cp}% 1067 \newcodeindex{fn}% 1068 \newcodeindex{vr}% 1069 \newcodeindex{tp}% 1070 \newcodeindex{ky}% 1071 \newcodeindex{pg}% 1072 } 1073 1074 % @bye. 1075 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1076 1077 1078 \message{pdf,} 1079 % adobe `portable' document format 1080 \newcount\tempnum 1081 \newcount\lnkcount 1082 \newtoks\filename 1083 \newcount\filenamelength 1084 \newcount\pgn 1085 \newtoks\toksA 1086 \newtoks\toksB 1087 \newtoks\toksC 1088 \newtoks\toksD 1089 \newbox\boxA 1090 \newcount\countA 1091 \newif\ifpdf 1092 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1093 1094 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1095 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1096 \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1097 \else 1098 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1099 \else 1100 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1101 \else 1102 \pdftrue 1103 \fi 1104 \fi 1105 \fi 1106 1107 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1108 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1109 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1110 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1111 % 1112 % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1113 % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1114 % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1115 % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1116 % do this reliably, so we use it. 1117 1118 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1119 % which we \xdef. 1120 \def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1121 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1122 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1123 % Many times it won't matter. 1124 \else 1125 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1126 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1127 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1128 \fi 1129 } 1130 1131 \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1132 with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1133 be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1134 output) for that.)} 1135 1136 \ifpdf 1137 % 1138 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex, 1139 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1140 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1141 % of actual black. 1142 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1143 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1144 % 1145 % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1146 % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1147 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1148 % 1149 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1150 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1151 \def\setcolor#1{% 1152 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1153 \domark 1154 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1155 } 1156 % 1157 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1158 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1159 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1160 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1161 % 1162 \def\makefootline{% 1163 \baselineskip24pt 1164 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1165 } 1166 % 1167 \def\makeheadline{% 1168 \vbox to 0pt{% 1169 \vskip-22.5pt 1170 \line{% 1171 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1172 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1173 \getcolormarks 1174 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1175 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1176 }% 1177 \vss 1178 }% 1179 \nointerlineskip 1180 } 1181 % 1182 % 1183 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1184 % 1185 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1186 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1187 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1188 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1189 % 1190 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1191 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1192 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1193 % bitmap. 1194 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1195 \begingroup 1196 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1197 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1198 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1199 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1200 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1201 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1202 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1203 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1204 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1205 \fi 1206 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1207 \fi 1208 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1209 \fi 1210 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1211 \fi 1212 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1213 \fi 1214 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1215 \fi 1216 \closein 1 1217 \endgroup 1218 % 1219 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1220 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1221 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1222 \immediate\pdfimage 1223 \else 1224 \immediate\pdfximage 1225 \fi 1226 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1227 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1228 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1229 #1.\pdfimgext 1230 \else 1231 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1232 \fi 1233 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1234 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1235 \fi} 1236 % 1237 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% 1238 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1239 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1240 \indexnofonts 1241 \turnoffactive 1242 \makevalueexpandable 1243 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1244 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1245 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1246 }} 1247 % 1248 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1249 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1250 % 1251 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as 1252 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. 1253 \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed} 1254 \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed} 1255 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1256 % 1257 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1258 % come from Petr Olsak 1259 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1260 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1261 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1262 \advance\tempnum by 1 1263 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1264 % 1265 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1266 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1267 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1268 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1269 % #4 is the page number 1270 % 1271 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1272 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1273 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1274 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1275 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1276 \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1277 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty 1278 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% 1279 \else 1280 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest 1281 \fi 1282 % 1283 % Also escape PDF chars in the display string. 1284 \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1285 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1286 % 1287 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1288 } 1289 % 1290 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1291 \begingroup 1292 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1293 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1294 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1295 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1296 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1297 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1298 }% 1299 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1300 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1301 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1302 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1303 }% 1304 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1305 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1306 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1307 }% 1308 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1309 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1310 }% 1311 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1312 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1313 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1314 % 1315 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1316 % al. a second time, below. 1317 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1318 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1319 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1320 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1321 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1322 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1323 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1324 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1325 \readdatafile{toc}% 1326 % 1327 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1328 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1329 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1330 % 1331 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1332 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1333 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1334 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1335 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1336 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1337 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1338 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1339 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1340 % 1341 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1342 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1343 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1344 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1345 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1346 % 1347 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1348 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1349 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1350 % we use for the index sort strings. 1351 % 1352 \indexnofonts 1353 \setupdatafile 1354 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1355 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1356 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1357 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1358 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1359 \input \tocreadfilename 1360 \endgroup 1361 } 1362 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1363 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1364 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1365 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1366 ] 1367 % 1368 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1369 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1370 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1371 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1372 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1373 \fi 1374 \nextsp} 1375 \def\getfilename#1{% 1376 \filenamelength=0 1377 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1378 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1379 \edef\temp{#1}% 1380 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1381 } 1382 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1383 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1384 \else 1385 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1386 \fi 1387 % make a live url in pdf output. 1388 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1389 \begingroup 1390 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1391 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1392 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1393 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1394 % 1395 \normalturnoffactive 1396 \def\@{@}% 1397 \let\/=\empty 1398 \makevalueexpandable 1399 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1400 % special-casing \var here? 1401 \def\var##1{##1}% 1402 % 1403 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1404 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1405 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1406 \endgroup} 1407 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1408 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1409 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1410 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1411 \def\maketoks{% 1412 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1413 \ifx\first0\adn0 1414 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1415 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1416 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1417 \else 1418 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1419 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1420 \let\next=\maketoks 1421 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1422 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1423 \fi 1424 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1425 \next} 1426 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1427 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1428 \def\pdflink#1{% 1429 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1430 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1431 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1432 \else 1433 % non-pdf mode 1434 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1435 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1436 \let\endlink = \relax 1437 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1438 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1439 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1440 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1441 1442 1443 \message{fonts,} 1444 1445 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 1446 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 1447 % italics, not bold italics. 1448 % 1449 \def\setfontstyle#1{% 1450 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 1451 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font 1452 } 1453 1454 % Select #1 fonts with the current style. 1455 % 1456 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} 1457 1458 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 1459 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 1460 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 1461 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 1462 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 1463 1464 % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since 1465 % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. 1466 \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} 1467 1468 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 1469 % So we set up a \sf. 1470 \newfam\sffam 1471 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 1472 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. 1473 1474 % We don't need math for this font style. 1475 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 1476 1477 1478 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1479 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1480 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1481 % 1482 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1483 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1484 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1485 % 1486 % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1487 \def\baselinefactor{1} 1488 % 1489 \newdimen\textleading 1490 \def\setleading#1{% 1491 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1492 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1493 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1494 \normalbaselines 1495 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1496 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1497 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1498 }% 1499 } 1500 1501 % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1502 % 1503 % do nothing with this by default. 1504 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1505 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1506 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1507 1508 % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1509 % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1510 % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1511 \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1512 \begingroup 1513 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1514 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1515 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1516 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1517 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1518 %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1519 %%Version: 1.000 1520 %%EndComments 1521 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 1522 12 dict begin 1523 begincmap 1524 /CIDSystemInfo 1525 << /Registry (TeX) 1526 /Ordering (OT1) 1527 /Supplement 0 1528 >> def 1529 /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1530 /CMapType 2 def 1531 1 begincodespacerange 1532 <00> <7F> 1533 endcodespacerange 1534 8 beginbfrange 1535 <00> <01> <0393> 1536 <09> <0A> <03A8> 1537 <23> <26> <0023> 1538 <28> <3B> <0028> 1539 <3F> <5B> <003F> 1540 <5D> <5E> <005D> 1541 <61> <7A> <0061> 1542 <7B> <7C> <2013> 1543 endbfrange 1544 40 beginbfchar 1545 <02> <0398> 1546 <03> <039B> 1547 <04> <039E> 1548 <05> <03A0> 1549 <06> <03A3> 1550 <07> <03D2> 1551 <08> <03A6> 1552 <0B> <00660066> 1553 <0C> <00660069> 1554 <0D> <0066006C> 1555 <0E> <006600660069> 1556 <0F> <00660066006C> 1557 <10> <0131> 1558 <11> <0237> 1559 <12> <0060> 1560 <13> <00B4> 1561 <14> <02C7> 1562 <15> <02D8> 1563 <16> <00AF> 1564 <17> <02DA> 1565 <18> <00B8> 1566 <19> <00DF> 1567 <1A> <00E6> 1568 <1B> <0153> 1569 <1C> <00F8> 1570 <1D> <00C6> 1571 <1E> <0152> 1572 <1F> <00D8> 1573 <21> <0021> 1574 <22> <201D> 1575 <27> <2019> 1576 <3C> <00A1> 1577 <3D> <003D> 1578 <3E> <00BF> 1579 <5C> <201C> 1580 <5F> <02D9> 1581 <60> <2018> 1582 <7D> <02DD> 1583 <7E> <007E> 1584 <7F> <00A8> 1585 endbfchar 1586 endcmap 1587 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1588 end 1589 end 1590 %%EndResource 1591 %%EOF 1592 }\endgroup 1593 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1594 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1595 }% 1596 % 1597 % \cmapOT1IT 1598 \begingroup 1599 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1600 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1601 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1602 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1603 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1604 %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1605 %%Version: 1.000 1606 %%EndComments 1607 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 1608 12 dict begin 1609 begincmap 1610 /CIDSystemInfo 1611 << /Registry (TeX) 1612 /Ordering (OT1IT) 1613 /Supplement 0 1614 >> def 1615 /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1616 /CMapType 2 def 1617 1 begincodespacerange 1618 <00> <7F> 1619 endcodespacerange 1620 8 beginbfrange 1621 <00> <01> <0393> 1622 <09> <0A> <03A8> 1623 <25> <26> <0025> 1624 <28> <3B> <0028> 1625 <3F> <5B> <003F> 1626 <5D> <5E> <005D> 1627 <61> <7A> <0061> 1628 <7B> <7C> <2013> 1629 endbfrange 1630 42 beginbfchar 1631 <02> <0398> 1632 <03> <039B> 1633 <04> <039E> 1634 <05> <03A0> 1635 <06> <03A3> 1636 <07> <03D2> 1637 <08> <03A6> 1638 <0B> <00660066> 1639 <0C> <00660069> 1640 <0D> <0066006C> 1641 <0E> <006600660069> 1642 <0F> <00660066006C> 1643 <10> <0131> 1644 <11> <0237> 1645 <12> <0060> 1646 <13> <00B4> 1647 <14> <02C7> 1648 <15> <02D8> 1649 <16> <00AF> 1650 <17> <02DA> 1651 <18> <00B8> 1652 <19> <00DF> 1653 <1A> <00E6> 1654 <1B> <0153> 1655 <1C> <00F8> 1656 <1D> <00C6> 1657 <1E> <0152> 1658 <1F> <00D8> 1659 <21> <0021> 1660 <22> <201D> 1661 <23> <0023> 1662 <24> <00A3> 1663 <27> <2019> 1664 <3C> <00A1> 1665 <3D> <003D> 1666 <3E> <00BF> 1667 <5C> <201C> 1668 <5F> <02D9> 1669 <60> <2018> 1670 <7D> <02DD> 1671 <7E> <007E> 1672 <7F> <00A8> 1673 endbfchar 1674 endcmap 1675 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1676 end 1677 end 1678 %%EndResource 1679 %%EOF 1680 }\endgroup 1681 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 1682 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1683 }% 1684 % 1685 % \cmapOT1TT 1686 \begingroup 1687 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1688 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1689 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1690 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1691 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 1692 %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 1693 %%Version: 1.000 1694 %%EndComments 1695 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 1696 12 dict begin 1697 begincmap 1698 /CIDSystemInfo 1699 << /Registry (TeX) 1700 /Ordering (OT1TT) 1701 /Supplement 0 1702 >> def 1703 /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 1704 /CMapType 2 def 1705 1 begincodespacerange 1706 <00> <7F> 1707 endcodespacerange 1708 5 beginbfrange 1709 <00> <01> <0393> 1710 <09> <0A> <03A8> 1711 <21> <26> <0021> 1712 <28> <5F> <0028> 1713 <61> <7E> <0061> 1714 endbfrange 1715 32 beginbfchar 1716 <02> <0398> 1717 <03> <039B> 1718 <04> <039E> 1719 <05> <03A0> 1720 <06> <03A3> 1721 <07> <03D2> 1722 <08> <03A6> 1723 <0B> <2191> 1724 <0C> <2193> 1725 <0D> <0027> 1726 <0E> <00A1> 1727 <0F> <00BF> 1728 <10> <0131> 1729 <11> <0237> 1730 <12> <0060> 1731 <13> <00B4> 1732 <14> <02C7> 1733 <15> <02D8> 1734 <16> <00AF> 1735 <17> <02DA> 1736 <18> <00B8> 1737 <19> <00DF> 1738 <1A> <00E6> 1739 <1B> <0153> 1740 <1C> <00F8> 1741 <1D> <00C6> 1742 <1E> <0152> 1743 <1F> <00D8> 1744 <20> <2423> 1745 <27> <2019> 1746 <60> <2018> 1747 <7F> <00A8> 1748 endbfchar 1749 endcmap 1750 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1751 end 1752 end 1753 %%EndResource 1754 %%EOF 1755 }\endgroup 1756 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 1757 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1758 }% 1759 \fi\fi 1760 1761 1762 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 1763 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 1764 % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 1765 % Example: 1766 % #1 = \textrm 1767 % #2 = \rmshape 1768 % #3 = 10 1769 % #4 = \mainmagstep 1770 % #5 = OT1 1771 % 1772 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 1773 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 1774 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 1775 } 1776 % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 1777 \let\cmap\gobble 1778 % 1779 % (end of cmaps) 1780 1781 % Use cm as the default font prefix. 1782 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 1783 % before you read in texinfo.tex. 1784 \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 1785 \def\fontprefix{cm} 1786 \fi 1787 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 1788 \def\rmshape{r} 1789 \def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 1790 \def\bfshape{b} 1791 \def\bxshape{bx} 1792 \def\ttshape{tt} 1793 \def\ttbshape{tt} 1794 \def\ttslshape{sltt} 1795 \def\itshape{ti} 1796 \def\itbshape{bxti} 1797 \def\slshape{sl} 1798 \def\slbshape{bxsl} 1799 \def\sfshape{ss} 1800 \def\sfbshape{ss} 1801 \def\scshape{csc} 1802 \def\scbshape{csc} 1803 1804 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 1805 % 1806 \def\definetextfontsizexi{% 1807 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 1808 \def\textnominalsize{11pt} 1809 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 1810 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1811 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1812 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1813 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1814 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1815 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1816 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1817 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1818 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1819 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1820 \def\textecsize{1095} 1821 1822 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1823 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1824 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1825 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1826 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1827 1828 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1829 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1830 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1831 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1832 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1833 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1834 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1835 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1836 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1837 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1838 \font\smalli=cmmi9 1839 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 1840 \def\smallecsize{0900} 1841 1842 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1843 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1844 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1845 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 1846 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1847 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 1848 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1849 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1850 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1851 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 1852 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 1853 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 1854 \def\smallerecsize{0800} 1855 1856 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 1857 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 1858 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1859 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 1860 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1861 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1862 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 1863 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1864 \let\titlebf=\titlerm 1865 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1866 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 1867 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 1868 \def\titleecsize{2074} 1869 1870 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 1871 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 1872 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 1873 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 1874 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1875 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 1876 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1877 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 1878 \let\chapbf=\chaprm 1879 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1880 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 1881 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 1882 \def\chapecsize{1728} 1883 1884 % Section fonts (14.4pt). 1885 \def\secnominalsize{14pt} 1886 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1887 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 1888 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 1889 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1890 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 1891 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1892 \let\secbf\secrm 1893 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 1894 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 1895 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 1896 \def\sececsize{1440} 1897 1898 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 1899 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 1900 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 1901 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 1902 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 1903 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 1904 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 1905 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 1906 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm 1907 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 1908 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 1909 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 1910 \def\ssececsize{1200} 1911 1912 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). 1913 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 1914 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1915 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 1916 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1917 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 1918 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1919 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1920 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 1921 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 1922 \font\reducedi=cmmi10 1923 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 1924 \def\reducedecsize{1000} 1925 1926 \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 1927 \textfonts % reset the current fonts 1928 \rm 1929 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 1930 1931 1932 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 1933 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 1934 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 1935 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 1936 % 1937 \def\definetextfontsizex{% 1938 % Text fonts (10pt). 1939 \def\textnominalsize{10pt} 1940 \edef\mainmagstep{1000} 1941 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1942 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1943 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1944 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1945 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1946 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1947 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1948 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1949 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1950 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1951 \def\textecsize{1000} 1952 1953 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1954 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 1955 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 1956 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 1957 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1958 1959 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1960 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1961 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1962 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1963 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1964 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1965 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1966 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1967 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1968 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1969 \font\smalli=cmmi9 1970 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 1971 \def\smallecsize{0900} 1972 1973 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1974 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1975 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1976 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 1977 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1978 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 1979 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1980 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1981 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1982 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 1983 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 1984 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 1985 \def\smallerecsize{0800} 1986 1987 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 1988 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 1989 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1990 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 1991 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1992 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1993 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 1994 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1995 \let\titlebf=\titlerm 1996 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1997 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 1998 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 1999 \def\titleecsize{2074} 2000 2001 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2002 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2003 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2004 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2005 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2006 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2007 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2008 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2009 \let\chapbf\chaprm 2010 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2011 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2012 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2013 \def\chapecsize{1440} 2014 2015 % Section fonts (12pt). 2016 \def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2017 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2018 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2019 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2020 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2021 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2022 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2023 \let\secbf\secrm 2024 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2025 \font\seci=cmmi12 2026 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2027 \def\sececsize{1200} 2028 2029 % Subsection fonts (10pt). 2030 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2031 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2032 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2033 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2034 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2035 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2036 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2037 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2038 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2039 \font\sseci=cmmi10 2040 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2041 \def\ssececsize{1000} 2042 2043 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). 2044 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2045 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2046 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2047 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2048 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2049 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2050 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2051 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2052 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2053 \font\reducedi=cmmi9 2054 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2055 \def\reducedecsize{0900} 2056 2057 \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2058 \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2059 \textfonts % reset the current fonts 2060 \rm 2061 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2062 2063 2064 % We provide the user-level command 2065 % @fonttextsize 10 2066 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2067 % 2068 \def\xiword{11} 2069 \def\xword{10} 2070 \def\xwordpt{10pt} 2071 % 2072 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2073 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2074 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2075 % 2076 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2077 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2078 % 2079 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2080 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2081 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2082 \else 2083 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2084 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2085 \fi\fi 2086 \endgroup 2087 } 2088 2089 2090 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2091 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since 2092 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except 2093 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and 2094 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). 2095 % 2096 \def\resetmathfonts{% 2097 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy 2098 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf 2099 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf 2100 } 2101 2102 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead 2103 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the 2104 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire 2105 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. 2106 % 2107 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2108 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in 2109 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2110 % 2111 % This all needs generalizing, badly. 2112 % 2113 \def\textfonts{% 2114 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl 2115 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc 2116 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy 2117 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl 2118 \def\curfontsize{text}% 2119 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2120 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} 2121 \def\titlefonts{% 2122 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl 2123 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc 2124 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy 2125 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl 2126 \def\curfontsize{title}% 2127 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% 2128 \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}} 2129 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} 2130 \def\chapfonts{% 2131 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl 2132 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc 2133 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy 2134 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl 2135 \def\curfontsize{chap}% 2136 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% 2137 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} 2138 \def\secfonts{% 2139 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl 2140 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc 2141 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy 2142 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl 2143 \def\curfontsize{sec}% 2144 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% 2145 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} 2146 \def\subsecfonts{% 2147 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl 2148 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc 2149 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy 2150 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl 2151 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% 2152 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% 2153 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} 2154 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts 2155 \def\reducedfonts{% 2156 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl 2157 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc 2158 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy 2159 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl 2160 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% 2161 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2162 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2163 \def\smallfonts{% 2164 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl 2165 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc 2166 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy 2167 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl 2168 \def\curfontsize{small}% 2169 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2170 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2171 \def\smallerfonts{% 2172 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl 2173 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc 2174 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy 2175 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl 2176 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% 2177 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2178 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} 2179 2180 % Fonts for short table of contents. 2181 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2182 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2183 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2184 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2185 2186 % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2187 \def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2188 \def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2189 2190 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2191 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2192 2193 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2194 % can fit this many characters: 2195 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2196 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2197 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2198 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2199 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2200 % 2201 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2202 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2203 % --karl, 24jan03. 2204 2205 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2206 % 2207 \definetextfontsizexi 2208 2209 2210 \message{markup,} 2211 2212 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2213 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2214 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2215 % this property, we can check that font parameter. 2216 % 2217 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2218 2219 % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2220 % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2221 % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2222 % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles 2223 % currently in effect. 2224 \newif\ifmarkupvar 2225 \newif\ifmarkupsamp 2226 \newif\ifmarkupkey 2227 %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. 2228 %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. 2229 \newif\ifmarkupcode 2230 \newif\ifmarkupkbd 2231 %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. 2232 %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. 2233 \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). 2234 \newif\ifmarkupexample 2235 \newif\ifmarkupverb 2236 \newif\ifmarkupverbatim 2237 2238 \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2239 2240 \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2241 \csname markup#1true\endcsname 2242 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2243 \markupstylesetup 2244 } 2245 2246 \let\markupstylesetup\empty 2247 2248 \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2249 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2250 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2251 \def#1% 2252 } 2253 2254 % Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2255 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2256 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2257 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2258 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2259 } 2260 2261 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2262 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2263 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2264 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2265 } 2266 2267 { 2268 \catcode`\'=\active 2269 \catcode`\`=\active 2270 2271 \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2272 \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2273 2274 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2275 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2276 } 2277 2278 \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2279 \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2280 % 2281 \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2282 \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2283 % 2284 \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2285 \let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2286 % 2287 \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2288 \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2289 % 2290 \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2291 \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2292 % 2293 \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2294 \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2295 2296 % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2297 % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2298 % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2299 % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2300 % lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2301 % 2302 \def\codequoteright{% 2303 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2304 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2305 '% 2306 \else \char'15 \fi 2307 \else \char'15 \fi 2308 } 2309 % 2310 % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2311 % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2312 % the code environments to do likewise. 2313 % 2314 \def\codequoteleft{% 2315 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2316 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2317 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2318 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2319 \relax`% 2320 \else \char'22 \fi 2321 \else \char'22 \fi 2322 } 2323 2324 % Commands to set the quote options. 2325 % 2326 \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2327 \def\temp{#1}% 2328 \ifx\temp\onword 2329 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2330 = t% 2331 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2332 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2333 = \relax 2334 \else 2335 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2336 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2337 \fi\fi 2338 } 2339 % 2340 \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2341 \def\temp{#1}% 2342 \ifx\temp\onword 2343 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2344 = t% 2345 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2346 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2347 = \relax 2348 \else 2349 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2350 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2351 \fi\fi 2352 } 2353 2354 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2355 \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2356 2357 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2358 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2359 2360 % Font commands. 2361 2362 % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2363 % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2364 % and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2365 \def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2366 \ifusingtt 2367 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2368 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2369 \next 2370 } 2371 \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2372 \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2373 2374 % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2375 % character) is such as not to need one. 2376 \def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2377 \ifx\next,% 2378 \else\ifx\next-% 2379 \else\ifx\next.% 2380 \else\ptexslash 2381 \fi\fi\fi 2382 \aftersmartic 2383 } 2384 2385 % Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2386 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2387 2388 % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2389 % ttsl for book titles, do we? 2390 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2391 2392 \def\aftersmartic{} 2393 \def\var#1{% 2394 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2395 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2396 \smartslanted{#1}% 2397 } 2398 2399 \let\i=\smartitalic 2400 \let\slanted=\smartslanted 2401 \let\dfn=\smartslanted 2402 \let\emph=\smartitalic 2403 2404 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2405 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2406 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2407 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2408 2409 % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2410 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2411 \let\strong=\b 2412 2413 % @sansserif, explicit sans. 2414 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2415 2416 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2417 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2418 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2419 % 2420 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2421 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2422 2423 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2424 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2425 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2426 % 2427 \catcode`@=11 2428 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2429 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m 2430 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m 2431 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2432 } 2433 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2434 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2435 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2436 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2437 } 2438 \catcode`@=\other 2439 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2440 2441 % @t, explicit typewriter. 2442 \def\t#1{% 2443 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2444 \null 2445 } 2446 2447 % @samp. 2448 \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2449 2450 % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2451 \let\indicateurl=\samp 2452 2453 % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2454 % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2455 % This is a subroutine for that. 2456 \def\tclose#1{% 2457 {% 2458 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2459 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2460 % 2461 % Switch to typewriter. 2462 \tt 2463 % 2464 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2465 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2466 % 2467 % Turn off hyphenation. 2468 \nohyphenation 2469 % 2470 \rawbackslash 2471 \plainfrenchspacing 2472 #1% 2473 }% 2474 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2475 } 2476 2477 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2478 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2479 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2480 % 2481 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2482 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2483 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2484 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. 2485 % -- rms. 2486 { 2487 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2488 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2489 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2490 % 2491 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2492 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2493 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2494 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2495 \ifallowcodebreaks 2496 \let-\codedash 2497 \let_\codeunder 2498 \else 2499 \let-\normaldash 2500 \let_\realunder 2501 \fi 2502 \codex 2503 } 2504 } 2505 2506 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2507 2508 \def\normaldash{-} 2509 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} 2510 \def\codeunder{% 2511 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2512 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2513 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2514 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2515 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2516 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2517 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2518 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2519 {\_}% 2520 } 2521 2522 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2523 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2524 % @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2525 % and _ on and off. 2526 % 2527 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2528 2529 \def\keywordtrue{true} 2530 \def\keywordfalse{false} 2531 2532 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2533 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2534 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2535 \allowcodebreakstrue 2536 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2537 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2538 \else 2539 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2540 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2541 \fi\fi 2542 } 2543 2544 % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2545 % so use \code rather than \samp. 2546 \let\command=\code 2547 \let\env=\code 2548 \let\file=\code 2549 \let\option=\code 2550 2551 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) 2552 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third 2553 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url 2554 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2555 % (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while 2556 % for comparison.) 2557 \def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish} 2558 \def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup 2559 \unsepspaces 2560 \pdfurl{#1}% 2561 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2562 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2563 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2564 \else 2565 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2566 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2567 \ifpdf 2568 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 2569 \else 2570 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 2571 \fi 2572 \else 2573 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it 2574 \fi 2575 \fi 2576 \endlink 2577 \endgroup} 2578 2579 % This \urefbreak definition is the active one. 2580 \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 2581 \let\uref=\urefbreak 2582 \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 2583 \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 2584 \unsepspaces 2585 \pdfurl{#1}% 2586 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2587 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2588 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2589 \else 2590 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2591 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2592 \ifpdf 2593 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 2594 \else 2595 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 2596 \fi 2597 \else 2598 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 2599 \fi 2600 \fi 2601 \endlink 2602 \endgroup} 2603 2604 % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 2605 \def\urefcatcodes{% 2606 \catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active 2607 \catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active 2608 \catcode\slashChar=\active 2609 } 2610 { 2611 \urefcatcodes 2612 % 2613 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 2614 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2615 \urefcatcodes 2616 \let&\urefcodeamp 2617 \let.\urefcodedot 2618 \let#\urefcodehash 2619 \let?\urefcodequest 2620 \let/\urefcodeslash 2621 \codex 2622 } 2623 % 2624 % By default, they are just regular characters. 2625 \global\def&{\normalamp} 2626 \global\def.{\normaldot} 2627 \global\def#{\normalhash} 2628 \global\def?{\normalquest} 2629 \global\def/{\normalslash} 2630 } 2631 2632 % we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help 2633 % line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in 2634 % cmtt at least, especially for dots. 2635 \def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em } 2636 \def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em } 2637 % 2638 \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch} 2639 \def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch} 2640 \def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch} 2641 \def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch} 2642 \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 2643 { 2644 \catcode`\/=\active 2645 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 2646 \urefprestretch \slashChar 2647 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 2648 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 2649 \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi 2650 } 2651 } 2652 2653 % One more complication: by default we'll break after the special 2654 % characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so 2655 % allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control. 2656 % 2657 \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 2658 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2659 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 2660 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 2661 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 2662 \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 2663 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 2664 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak} 2665 \else 2666 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2667 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 2668 \fi\fi\fi 2669 } 2670 \def\wordafter{after} 2671 \def\wordbefore{before} 2672 \def\wordnone{none} 2673 2674 \urefbreakstyle after 2675 2676 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 2677 % 2678 \let\url=\uref 2679 2680 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 2681 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 2682 % 2683 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 2684 \ifpdf 2685 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 2686 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 2687 \unsepspaces 2688 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 2689 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2690 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 2691 \endlink 2692 \endgroup} 2693 \else 2694 \let\email=\uref 2695 \fi 2696 2697 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 2698 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 2699 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 2700 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 2701 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2702 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 2703 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 2704 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 2705 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2706 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 2707 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2708 \else 2709 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2710 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 2711 \fi\fi\fi 2712 } 2713 \def\worddistinct{distinct} 2714 \def\wordexample{example} 2715 \def\wordcode{code} 2716 2717 % Default is `distinct'. 2718 \kbdinputstyle distinct 2719 2720 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 2721 % then @kbd has no effect. 2722 \def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 2723 2724 \def\xkey{\key} 2725 \def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 2726 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 2727 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 2728 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 2729 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 2730 } 2731 2732 % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 2733 %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2734 %\font\keysy=cmsy9 2735 %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 2736 % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 2737 % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 2738 % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 2739 % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 2740 % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 2741 2742 % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 2743 % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 2744 % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 2745 % 2746 \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 2747 \nohyphenation 2748 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 2749 #1}\null} 2750 2751 % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 2752 \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 2753 2754 % @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 2755 \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 2756 \def\click{\arrow} 2757 2758 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 2759 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 2760 % 2761 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 2762 2763 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', 2764 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for 2765 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. 2766 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} 2767 2768 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 2769 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 2770 % all-uppercase. 2771 % 2772 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 2773 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2774 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% 2775 \def\temp{#2}% 2776 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2777 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2778 \fi 2779 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 2780 } 2781 2782 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 2783 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 2784 % 2785 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 2786 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2787 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2788 \def\temp{#2}% 2789 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2790 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2791 \fi 2792 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 2793 } 2794 2795 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 2796 % 2797 \def\asis#1{#1} 2798 2799 % @math outputs its argument in math mode. 2800 % 2801 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 2802 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 2803 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 2804 % which is what @var uses. 2805 { 2806 \catcode`\_ = \active 2807 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 2808 \catcode`\_=\active 2809 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 2810 } 2811 } 2812 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 2813 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 2814 % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 2815 % 2816 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 2817 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 2818 % 2819 \def\math{% 2820 \tex 2821 \mathunderscore 2822 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 2823 \mathactive 2824 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 2825 \let\"=\ddot 2826 \let\'=\acute 2827 \let\==\bar 2828 \let\^=\hat 2829 \let\`=\grave 2830 \let\u=\breve 2831 \let\v=\check 2832 \let\~=\tilde 2833 \let\dotaccent=\dot 2834 $\finishmath 2835 } 2836 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 2837 2838 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 2839 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 2840 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 2841 % 2842 { 2843 \catcode`^ = \active 2844 \catcode`< = \active 2845 \catcode`> = \active 2846 \catcode`+ = \active 2847 \catcode`' = \active 2848 \gdef\mathactive{% 2849 \let^ = \ptexhat 2850 \let< = \ptexless 2851 \let> = \ptexgtr 2852 \let+ = \ptexplus 2853 \let' = \ptexquoteright 2854 } 2855 } 2856 2857 % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun. 2858 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} 2859 2860 % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 2861 % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 2862 % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 2863 % 2864 \def\outfmtnametex{tex} 2865 % 2866 \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 2867 \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 2868 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 2869 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 2870 } 2871 % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 2872 % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 2873 % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 2874 % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 2875 % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 2876 % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 2877 % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 2878 % 2879 \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 2880 \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 2881 \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 2882 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 2883 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 2884 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 2885 } 2886 2887 2888 \message{glyphs,} 2889 % and logos. 2890 2891 % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 2892 \def\@{\char64 } 2893 \let\atchar=\@ 2894 2895 % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 2896 % Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do 2897 % not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math. 2898 \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}} 2899 \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}} 2900 \let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{ 2901 \let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\} 2902 \begingroup 2903 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, 2904 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. 2905 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other 2906 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 2907 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other 2908 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% 2909 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% 2910 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% 2911 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% 2912 !endgroup 2913 2914 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 2915 \let\comma = , 2916 2917 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 2918 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 2919 \let\, = \ptexc 2920 \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 2921 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 2922 \let\tieaccent = \ptext 2923 \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 2924 \let\udotaccent = \d 2925 2926 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 2927 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 2928 \def\questiondown{?`} 2929 \def\exclamdown{!`} 2930 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} 2931 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} 2932 2933 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 2934 \def\imacro{i} 2935 \def\jmacro{j} 2936 \def\dotless#1{% 2937 \def\temp{#1}% 2938 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 2939 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 2940 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 2941 \fi\fi 2942 } 2943 2944 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 2945 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 2946 % 2947 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 2948 2949 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 2950 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 2951 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 2952 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 2953 % \scriptscriptstyle). 2954 % 2955 \def\LaTeX{% 2956 L\kern-.36em 2957 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 2958 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 2959 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 2960 % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 2961 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 2962 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 2963 \else 2964 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 2965 \selectfonts\lllsize A% 2966 \fi 2967 }% 2968 \vss 2969 }}% 2970 \kern-.15em 2971 \TeX 2972 } 2973 2974 % Some math mode symbols. 2975 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} 2976 \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} 2977 \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} 2978 \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} 2979 2980 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 2981 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 2982 % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 2983 % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 2984 % whichever is larger. 2985 % 2986 \def\dots{% 2987 \leavevmode 2988 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 2989 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 2990 \dimen0 = \wd0 2991 \else 2992 \dimen0 = 1.5em 2993 \fi 2994 \hbox to \dimen0{% 2995 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 2996 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 2997 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 2998 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 2999 }% 3000 } 3001 3002 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3003 % 3004 \def\enddots{% 3005 \dots 3006 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3007 } 3008 3009 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3010 % 3011 % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3012 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3013 % 3014 \def\point{$\star$} 3015 \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3016 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3017 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3018 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3019 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3020 3021 % The @error{} command. 3022 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3023 % 3024 \newbox\errorbox 3025 % 3026 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3027 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3028 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3029 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3030 % 3031 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3032 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3033 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3034 \vbox{% 3035 \hrule height\dimen2 3036 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3037 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3038 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3039 \hrule height\dimen2} 3040 \hfil} 3041 % 3042 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3043 3044 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3045 % 3046 \def\pounds{{\it\$}} 3047 3048 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3049 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3050 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3051 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3052 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3053 % 3054 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3055 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3056 % font height. 3057 % 3058 % feymr - regular 3059 % feymo - slanted 3060 % feybr - bold 3061 % feybo - bold slanted 3062 % 3063 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3064 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3065 % Hmm. 3066 % 3067 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3068 % Hope not. 3069 % 3070 % 3071 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3072 \def\eurofont{% 3073 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3074 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3075 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3076 % font installed. 3077 % 3078 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3079 % that to the current nominal size. 3080 % 3081 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3082 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3083 % 3084 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3085 % 3086 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3087 % bold: 3088 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3089 \else 3090 % regular: 3091 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3092 \fi 3093 \thiseurofont 3094 } 3095 3096 % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3097 % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3098 % the redefinition. 3099 % 3100 % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3101 \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3102 \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3103 \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3104 \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3105 % 3106 \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3107 \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3108 \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3109 \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3110 \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3111 \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3112 \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3113 \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3114 % 3115 % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3116 % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3117 % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3118 % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3119 % 3120 % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3121 % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3122 % the same EC font. 3123 \def\ogonek#1{{% 3124 \def\temp{#1}% 3125 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3126 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3127 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3128 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3129 \else 3130 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3131 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3132 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3133 \fi 3134 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3135 }% 3136 } 3137 \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3138 \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3139 \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3140 \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3141 % 3142 % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs. 3143 \def\ecfont{% 3144 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3145 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3146 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3147 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3148 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3149 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3150 \ifmonospace 3151 % typewriter: 3152 \font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3153 \else 3154 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3155 % bold: 3156 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3157 \else 3158 % regular: 3159 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3160 \fi 3161 \fi 3162 \thisecfont 3163 } 3164 3165 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3166 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3167 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3168 % 3169 \def\registeredsymbol{% 3170 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% 3171 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3172 }$% 3173 } 3174 3175 % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3176 % 3177 \def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3178 3179 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3180 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3181 % so we'll define it if necessary. 3182 % 3183 \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3184 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3185 \fi 3186 3187 % Quotes. 3188 \chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3189 \chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3190 \chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3191 \chardef\quoteright=`\' 3192 3193 3194 \message{page headings,} 3195 3196 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3197 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3198 3199 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3200 \newif\ifseenauthor 3201 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3202 3203 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the 3204 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. 3205 % 3206 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 3207 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 3208 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 3209 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 3210 3211 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3212 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3213 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3214 3215 \envdef\titlepage{% 3216 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3217 \begingroup 3218 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3219 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3220 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3221 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3222 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3223 % 3224 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3225 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3226 \let\oldpage = \page 3227 \def\page{% 3228 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3229 \finishtitlepage 3230 \fi 3231 \let\page = \oldpage 3232 \page 3233 \null 3234 }% 3235 } 3236 3237 \def\Etitlepage{% 3238 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3239 \finishtitlepage 3240 \fi 3241 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3242 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3243 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3244 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3245 \oldpage 3246 \endgroup 3247 % 3248 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3249 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3250 \HEADINGSon 3251 % 3252 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. 3253 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 3254 \shortcontents 3255 \contents 3256 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 3257 \global\let\contents = \relax 3258 \fi 3259 % 3260 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 3261 \contents 3262 \global\let\contents = \relax 3263 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 3264 \fi 3265 } 3266 3267 \def\finishtitlepage{% 3268 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3269 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3270 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3271 } 3272 3273 % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3274 % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3275 % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because 3276 % it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold. \par 3277 % should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3278 % 3279 \def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3280 \rmisbold 3281 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3282 \parindent=0pt 3283 \tolerance=5000 3284 \ptexraggedright 3285 } 3286 3287 % Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3288 3289 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm 3290 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3291 3292 \parseargdef\title{% 3293 \checkenv\titlepage 3294 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3295 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3296 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3297 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3298 } 3299 3300 \parseargdef\subtitle{% 3301 \checkenv\titlepage 3302 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3303 } 3304 3305 % @author should come last, but may come many times. 3306 % It can also be used inside @quotation. 3307 % 3308 \parseargdef\author{% 3309 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3310 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3311 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3312 \else 3313 \checkenv\titlepage 3314 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3315 {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% 3316 \fi 3317 } 3318 3319 3320 % Set up page headings and footings. 3321 3322 \let\thispage=\folio 3323 3324 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3325 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3326 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3327 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3328 3329 % Now make TeX use those variables 3330 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3331 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3332 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3333 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3334 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3335 3336 % Commands to set those variables. 3337 % For example, this is what @headings on does 3338 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3339 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3340 % @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3341 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3342 3343 3344 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3345 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3346 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3347 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3348 3349 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3350 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3351 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3352 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3353 3354 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3355 3356 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3357 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3358 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3359 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3360 3361 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3362 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3363 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3364 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3365 % 3366 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3367 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3368 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt 3369 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3370 } 3371 3372 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3373 3374 % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3375 % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3376 % 3377 % The same set of arguments for: 3378 % 3379 % @oddheadingmarks 3380 % @evenfootingmarks 3381 % @oddfootingmarks 3382 % @everyheadingmarks 3383 % @everyfootingmarks 3384 3385 \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3386 \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3387 \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3388 \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3389 \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3390 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3391 \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3392 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3393 % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3394 \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3395 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3396 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3397 } 3398 3399 \everyheadingmarks bottom 3400 \everyfootingmarks bottom 3401 3402 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3403 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3404 % @headings off turns them off. 3405 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3406 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3407 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3408 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3409 % By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3410 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3411 3412 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3413 3414 \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3415 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 3416 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 3417 } 3418 3419 \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3420 \HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3421 3422 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3423 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3424 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3425 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3426 % edge of all pages. 3427 \def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3428 \global\pageno=1 3429 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3430 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3431 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3432 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3433 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3434 } 3435 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3436 3437 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3438 % page number on top right. 3439 \def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3440 \global\pageno=1 3441 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3442 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3443 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3444 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3445 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3446 } 3447 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3448 3449 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3450 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3451 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3452 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3453 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3454 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3455 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3456 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3457 } 3458 3459 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3460 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3461 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3462 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3463 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3464 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3465 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3466 } 3467 3468 % Subroutines used in generating headings 3469 % This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3470 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3471 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3472 \ifx\today\thisisundefined 3473 \def\today{% 3474 \number\day\space 3475 \ifcase\month 3476 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3477 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3478 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3479 \fi 3480 \space\number\year} 3481 \fi 3482 3483 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3484 % It generates no output of its own. 3485 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3486 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3487 3488 3489 \message{tables,} 3490 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3491 3492 % default indentation of table text 3493 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3494 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3495 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3496 % margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3497 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3498 3499 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3500 \newdimen\itemmax 3501 3502 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3503 % these defs. 3504 % They also define \itemindex 3505 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3506 3507 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3508 3509 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3510 3511 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3512 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3513 3514 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3515 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3516 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3517 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3518 \itemindex{#1}% 3519 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3520 % 3521 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3522 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3523 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3524 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3525 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3526 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3527 % 3528 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3529 % but leave it ragged-right. 3530 \begingroup 3531 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3532 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3533 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 3534 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3535 \endgroup 3536 % 3537 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3538 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3539 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3540 % 3541 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3542 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3543 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 3544 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 3545 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 3546 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 3547 % 3548 \penalty 10001 3549 \endgroup 3550 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 3551 \else 3552 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 3553 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 3554 \noindent 3555 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 3556 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 3557 % eventually be printed. 3558 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 3559 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 3560 \unhbox0 3561 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 3562 \endgroup 3563 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 3564 \fi 3565 } 3566 3567 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 3568 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 3569 3570 % @table, @ftable, @vtable. 3571 \envdef\table{% 3572 \let\itemindex\gobble 3573 \tablecheck{table}% 3574 } 3575 \envdef\ftable{% 3576 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 3577 \tablecheck{ftable}% 3578 } 3579 \envdef\vtable{% 3580 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 3581 \tablecheck{vtable}% 3582 } 3583 \def\tablecheck#1{% 3584 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 3585 \endgroup 3586 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 3587 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 3588 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 3589 \else 3590 \let\next\tablex 3591 \fi 3592 \next 3593 } 3594 \def\tablex#1{% 3595 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 3596 \parsearg\tabley 3597 } 3598 \def\tabley#1{% 3599 {% 3600 \makevalueexpandable 3601 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 3602 \expandafter 3603 }\temp \endtablez 3604 } 3605 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 3606 \aboveenvbreak 3607 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 3608 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 3609 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 3610 \itemmax=\tableindent 3611 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 3612 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 3613 \exdentamount=\tableindent 3614 \parindent = 0pt 3615 \parskip = \smallskipamount 3616 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3617 \let\item = \internalBitem 3618 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 3619 } 3620 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 3621 \let\Eftable\Etable 3622 \let\Evtable\Etable 3623 \let\Eitemize\Etable 3624 \let\Eenumerate\Etable 3625 3626 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 3627 3628 \newcount \itemno 3629 3630 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 3631 3632 \def\doitemize#1{% 3633 \aboveenvbreak 3634 \itemmax=\itemindent 3635 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 3636 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 3637 \exdentamount=\itemindent 3638 \parindent=0pt 3639 \parskip=\smallskipamount 3640 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3641 % 3642 % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says 3643 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 3644 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 3645 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 3646 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 3647 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 3648 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 3649 % 3650 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 3651 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 3652 % 3653 \let\item=\itemizeitem 3654 } 3655 3656 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 3657 % 3658 \def\itemizeitem{% 3659 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 3660 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 3661 {% 3662 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 3663 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 3664 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 3665 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 3666 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 3667 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 3668 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 3669 % that's the theory. 3670 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 3671 \noindent 3672 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 3673 % 3674 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. 3675 \flushcr 3676 } 3677 3678 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 3679 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 3680 % 3681 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 3682 3683 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 3684 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 3685 % argument is the same as `1'. 3686 % 3687 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 3688 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 3689 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 3690 \def\thearg{#1}% 3691 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 3692 % 3693 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 3694 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 3695 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 3696 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 3697 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 3698 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 3699 \ifx\rest\empty 3700 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 3701 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 3702 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 3703 % not equal to itself. 3704 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 3705 % 3706 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 3707 % continuing to look for a <number>. 3708 % 3709 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 3710 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 3711 \else 3712 % It's a letter. 3713 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 3714 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 3715 \else 3716 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 3717 \fi 3718 \fi 3719 \else 3720 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 3721 \numericenumerate 3722 \fi 3723 } 3724 3725 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 3726 % given in \thearg. 3727 % 3728 \def\numericenumerate{% 3729 \itemno = \thearg 3730 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 3731 } 3732 3733 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 3734 \def\lowercaseenumerate{% 3735 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3736 \startenumeration{% 3737 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3738 \ifnum\itemno=0 3739 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3740 alphabet}% 3741 \fi 3742 \char\lccode\itemno 3743 }% 3744 } 3745 3746 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 3747 \def\uppercaseenumerate{% 3748 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3749 \startenumeration{% 3750 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3751 \ifnum\itemno=0 3752 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3753 alphabet} 3754 \fi 3755 \char\uccode\itemno 3756 }% 3757 } 3758 3759 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 3760 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 3761 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 3762 % 3763 \def\startenumeration#1{% 3764 \advance\itemno by -1 3765 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 3766 } 3767 3768 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 3769 % to @enumerate. 3770 % 3771 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 3772 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 3773 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3774 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3775 3776 3777 % @multitable macros 3778 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 3779 % 3780 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 3781 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 3782 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 3783 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 3784 3785 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 3786 3787 % To make preamble: 3788 % 3789 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 3790 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 3791 % @item ... 3792 % 3793 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 3794 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 3795 % columns as desired. 3796 3797 3798 % Or use a template: 3799 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3800 % @item ... 3801 % using the widest term desired in each column. 3802 3803 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 3804 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 3805 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 3806 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 3807 3808 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 3809 % if they are. 3810 3811 % Sample multitable: 3812 3813 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3814 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 3815 % @item 3816 % first col stuff 3817 % @tab 3818 % second col stuff 3819 % @tab 3820 % third col 3821 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 3822 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 3823 % 3824 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 3825 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 3826 % @end multitable 3827 3828 % Default dimensions may be reset by user. 3829 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 3830 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 3831 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 3832 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 3833 % to baseline. 3834 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 3835 % 3836 \newskip\multitableparskip 3837 \newskip\multitableparindent 3838 \newdimen\multitablecolspace 3839 \newskip\multitablelinespace 3840 \multitableparskip=0pt 3841 \multitableparindent=6pt 3842 \multitablecolspace=12pt 3843 \multitablelinespace=0pt 3844 3845 % Macros used to set up halign preamble: 3846 % 3847 \let\endsetuptable\relax 3848 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 3849 \let\columnfractions\relax 3850 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 3851 \newif\ifsetpercent 3852 3853 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 3854 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 3855 % 3856 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 3857 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3858 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 3859 \setuptable 3860 } 3861 3862 \newcount\colcount 3863 \def\setuptable#1{% 3864 \def\firstarg{#1}% 3865 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 3866 \let\go = \relax 3867 \else 3868 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 3869 \global\setpercenttrue 3870 \else 3871 \ifsetpercent 3872 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 3873 \else 3874 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3875 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 3876 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 3877 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 3878 \fi 3879 \fi 3880 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 3881 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 3882 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 3883 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 3884 \else 3885 \let\go = \setuptable 3886 \fi% 3887 \fi 3888 \go 3889 } 3890 3891 % multitable-only commands. 3892 % 3893 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. 3894 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group 3895 % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to 3896 % undo it ourselves. 3897 \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 3898 \def\headitem{% 3899 \checkenv\multitable 3900 \crcr 3901 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 3902 \the\everytab % for the first item 3903 }% 3904 % 3905 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 3906 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 3907 % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 3908 % --karl, nathan (a] acm.org, 20apr99. 3909 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 3910 3911 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 3912 % 3913 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 3914 % 3915 \envdef\multitable{% 3916 \vskip\parskip 3917 \startsavinginserts 3918 % 3919 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 3920 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 3921 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 3922 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 3923 \def\item{\crcr}% 3924 % 3925 \tolerance=9500 3926 \hbadness=9500 3927 \setmultitablespacing 3928 \parskip=\multitableparskip 3929 \parindent=\multitableparindent 3930 \overfullrule=0pt 3931 \global\colcount=0 3932 % 3933 \everycr = {% 3934 \noalign{% 3935 \global\everytab={}% 3936 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 3937 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. 3938 \checkinserts 3939 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. 3940 %\filbreak 3941 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the 3942 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the 3943 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. 3944 }% 3945 }% 3946 % 3947 \parsearg\domultitable 3948 } 3949 \def\domultitable#1{% 3950 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 3951 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 3952 % 3953 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 3954 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 3955 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 3956 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 3957 \halign\bgroup &% 3958 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3959 \multistrut 3960 \vtop{% 3961 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 3962 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 3963 % 3964 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 3965 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 3966 % the first one. 3967 % 3968 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 3969 % to the width of each template entry. 3970 % 3971 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 3972 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 3973 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 3974 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 3975 % 3976 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 3977 \rightskip=0pt 3978 \ifnum\colcount=1 3979 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 3980 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 3981 \else 3982 \ifsetpercent \else 3983 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 3984 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 3985 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 3986 \fi 3987 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 3988 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 3989 \fi 3990 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 3991 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 3992 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 3993 % For example: 3994 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 3995 % @item @code{#} 3996 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 3997 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 3998 % marking characters. 3999 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 4000 }\cr 4001 } 4002 \def\Emultitable{% 4003 \crcr 4004 \egroup % end the \halign 4005 \global\setpercentfalse 4006 } 4007 4008 \def\setmultitablespacing{% 4009 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4010 % 4011 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4012 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4013 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4014 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4015 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4016 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4017 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4018 \fi 4019 % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4020 % table. If not, do nothing. 4021 % If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4022 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4023 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4024 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4025 % than skip between lines in the table. 4026 \fi% 4027 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4028 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4029 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4030 % than skip between lines in the table. 4031 \fi} 4032 4033 4034 \message{conditionals,} 4035 4036 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4037 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4038 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4039 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4040 % attempt to close an environment group. 4041 % 4042 \def\makecond#1{% 4043 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4044 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4045 } 4046 \makecond{iftex} 4047 \makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4048 \makecond{ifnothtml} 4049 \makecond{ifnotinfo} 4050 \makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4051 \makecond{ifnotxml} 4052 4053 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4054 % 4055 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4056 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4057 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4058 \def\html{\doignore{html}} 4059 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4060 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4061 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4062 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4063 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4064 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4065 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4066 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4067 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4068 4069 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4070 % 4071 % A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4072 \newcount\doignorecount 4073 4074 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4075 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4076 \obeylines 4077 \catcode`\@ = \other 4078 \catcode`\{ = \other 4079 \catcode`\} = \other 4080 % 4081 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4082 \spaceisspace 4083 % 4084 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4085 \doignorecount = 0 4086 % 4087 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4088 \dodoignore{#1}% 4089 } 4090 4091 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4092 \obeylines % 4093 % 4094 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4095 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4096 % 4097 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4098 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4099 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4100 % 4101 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4102 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4103 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4104 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4105 % 4106 % And now expand that command. 4107 \doignoretext ^^M% 4108 }% 4109 } 4110 4111 \def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4112 \def\temp{#1}% 4113 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4114 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4115 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4116 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4117 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4118 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4119 \fi 4120 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4121 } 4122 4123 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4124 % 4125 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4126 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4127 \let\next\enddoignore 4128 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4129 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4130 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4131 \fi 4132 \next 4133 } 4134 4135 % Finish off ignored text. 4136 { \obeylines% 4137 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4138 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4139 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4140 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4141 } 4142 4143 4144 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4145 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4146 % 4147 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4148 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4149 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4150 % didn't need it. 4151 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4152 % 4153 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4154 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4155 {% 4156 \makevalueexpandable 4157 \def\temp{#2}% 4158 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4159 \ifx\temp\empty 4160 \next{}% 4161 \else 4162 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4163 \fi 4164 }% 4165 } 4166 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4167 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4168 4169 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4170 % 4171 \parseargdef\clear{% 4172 {% 4173 \makevalueexpandable 4174 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4175 }% 4176 } 4177 4178 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4179 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4180 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4181 { 4182 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active 4183 % 4184 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4185 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4186 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4187 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4188 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4189 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4190 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4191 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4192 } 4193 } 4194 4195 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 4196 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 4197 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 4198 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 4199 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 4200 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 4201 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 4202 % 4203 \def\expandablevalue#1{% 4204 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4205 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4206 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4207 \else 4208 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4209 \fi 4210 } 4211 4212 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4213 % with @set. 4214 % 4215 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. 4216 % 4217 \makecond{ifset} 4218 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4219 \def\doifset#1#2{% 4220 {% 4221 \makevalueexpandable 4222 \let\next=\empty 4223 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4224 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4225 \fi 4226 \expandafter 4227 }\next 4228 } 4229 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4230 4231 % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4232 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4233 % 4234 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4235 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4236 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4237 % 4238 \makecond{ifclear} 4239 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4240 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4241 4242 % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4243 % without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4244 % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4245 % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4246 % 4247 \makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4248 \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4249 % 4250 \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4251 \makevalueexpandable 4252 \let\next=\empty 4253 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4254 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4255 \fi 4256 \expandafter 4257 }\next 4258 } 4259 \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4260 4261 % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4262 \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4263 \def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4264 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4265 \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4266 4267 % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4268 % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4269 \set txicommandconditionals 4270 4271 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4272 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4273 \let\dircategory=\comment 4274 4275 % @defininfoenclose. 4276 \let\definfoenclose=\comment 4277 4278 4279 \message{indexing,} 4280 % Index generation facilities 4281 4282 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4283 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4284 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4285 4286 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. 4287 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that 4288 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. 4289 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4290 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. 4291 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4292 % for the sake of vms. 4293 % 4294 \def\newindex#1{% 4295 \iflinks 4296 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 4297 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file 4298 \fi 4299 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4300 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4301 } 4302 4303 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4304 % 4305 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4306 4307 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4308 % 4309 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4310 % 4311 \def\newcodeindex#1{% 4312 \iflinks 4313 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 4314 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 4315 \fi 4316 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4317 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4318 } 4319 4320 4321 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4322 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4323 % 4324 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4325 % inside @code. 4326 % 4327 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4328 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4329 4330 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4331 % #3 the target index (bar). 4332 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4333 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up 4334 % closing the target index. 4335 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax 4336 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the 4337 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. 4338 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname 4339 \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 4340 \fi 4341 % redefine \fooindfile: 4342 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4343 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4344 % redefine \fooindex: 4345 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4346 } 4347 4348 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. 4349 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4350 % and it is "foo", the name of the index. 4351 4352 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. 4353 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. 4354 4355 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 4356 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 4357 4358 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} 4359 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4360 4361 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4362 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} 4363 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4364 4365 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 4366 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, 4367 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. 4368 % 4369 \def\indexdummies{% 4370 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 4371 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. 4372 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% 4373 % 4374 % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy) 4375 % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more 4376 % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. 4377 % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes 4378 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we 4379 % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma. 4380 \def\{{{\tt\char123}}% 4381 \def\}{{\tt\char125}}% 4382 % 4383 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is 4384 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts 4385 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, 4386 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput 4387 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput 4388 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that 4389 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it 4390 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that 4391 % is still getting written without apparent harm. 4392 % 4393 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to 4394 % help-texinfo, 22may06): 4395 % @macro funindex {WORD} 4396 % @findex xyz 4397 % @end macro 4398 % ... 4399 % @funindex commtest 4400 % 4401 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. 4402 % 4403 % Sample whatsit resulting: 4404 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} 4405 % 4406 % So: 4407 \let\endinput = \empty 4408 % 4409 % Do the redefinitions. 4410 \commondummies 4411 } 4412 4413 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to 4414 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of 4415 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, 4416 % this will be simpler. 4417 % 4418 \def\atdummies{% 4419 \def\@{@@}% 4420 \def\ {@ }% 4421 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd 4422 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd 4423 % 4424 % Do the redefinitions. 4425 \commondummies 4426 \otherbackslash 4427 } 4428 4429 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. 4430 % 4431 \def\commondummies{% 4432 % 4433 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4434 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4435 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4436 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4437 % from whatever follows. 4438 % 4439 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4440 % space. 4441 % 4442 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4443 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4444 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4445 % 4446 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% 4447 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% 4448 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4449 % 4450 \commondummiesnofonts 4451 % 4452 \definedummyletter\_% 4453 \definedummyletter\-% 4454 % 4455 % Non-English letters. 4456 \definedummyword\AA 4457 \definedummyword\AE 4458 \definedummyword\DH 4459 \definedummyword\L 4460 \definedummyword\O 4461 \definedummyword\OE 4462 \definedummyword\TH 4463 \definedummyword\aa 4464 \definedummyword\ae 4465 \definedummyword\dh 4466 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4467 \definedummyword\l 4468 \definedummyword\o 4469 \definedummyword\oe 4470 \definedummyword\ordf 4471 \definedummyword\ordm 4472 \definedummyword\questiondown 4473 \definedummyword\ss 4474 \definedummyword\th 4475 % 4476 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4477 \definedummyword\bf 4478 \definedummyword\gtr 4479 \definedummyword\hat 4480 \definedummyword\less 4481 \definedummyword\sf 4482 \definedummyword\sl 4483 \definedummyword\tclose 4484 \definedummyword\tt 4485 % 4486 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4487 \definedummyword\TeX 4488 % 4489 % Assorted special characters. 4490 \definedummyword\arrow 4491 \definedummyword\bullet 4492 \definedummyword\comma 4493 \definedummyword\copyright 4494 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4495 \definedummyword\dots 4496 \definedummyword\enddots 4497 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4498 \definedummyword\equiv 4499 \definedummyword\error 4500 \definedummyword\euro 4501 \definedummyword\expansion 4502 \definedummyword\geq 4503 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4504 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4505 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4506 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4507 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4508 \definedummyword\leq 4509 \definedummyword\minus 4510 \definedummyword\ogonek 4511 \definedummyword\pounds 4512 \definedummyword\point 4513 \definedummyword\print 4514 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4515 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4516 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4517 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4518 \definedummyword\quoteright 4519 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4520 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4521 \definedummyword\result 4522 \definedummyword\textdegree 4523 % 4524 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4525 \macrolist 4526 % 4527 \normalturnoffactive 4528 % 4529 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any 4530 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. 4531 \makevalueexpandable 4532 } 4533 4534 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. 4535 % 4536 \def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4537 % Control letters and accents. 4538 \definedummyletter\!% 4539 \definedummyaccent\"% 4540 \definedummyaccent\'% 4541 \definedummyletter\*% 4542 \definedummyaccent\,% 4543 \definedummyletter\.% 4544 \definedummyletter\/% 4545 \definedummyletter\:% 4546 \definedummyaccent\=% 4547 \definedummyletter\?% 4548 \definedummyaccent\^% 4549 \definedummyaccent\`% 4550 \definedummyaccent\~% 4551 \definedummyword\u 4552 \definedummyword\v 4553 \definedummyword\H 4554 \definedummyword\dotaccent 4555 \definedummyword\ogonek 4556 \definedummyword\ringaccent 4557 \definedummyword\tieaccent 4558 \definedummyword\ubaraccent 4559 \definedummyword\udotaccent 4560 \definedummyword\dotless 4561 % 4562 % Texinfo font commands. 4563 \definedummyword\b 4564 \definedummyword\i 4565 \definedummyword\r 4566 \definedummyword\sansserif 4567 \definedummyword\sc 4568 \definedummyword\slanted 4569 \definedummyword\t 4570 % 4571 % Commands that take arguments. 4572 \definedummyword\abbr 4573 \definedummyword\acronym 4574 \definedummyword\anchor 4575 \definedummyword\cite 4576 \definedummyword\code 4577 \definedummyword\command 4578 \definedummyword\dfn 4579 \definedummyword\dmn 4580 \definedummyword\email 4581 \definedummyword\emph 4582 \definedummyword\env 4583 \definedummyword\file 4584 \definedummyword\image 4585 \definedummyword\indicateurl 4586 \definedummyword\inforef 4587 \definedummyword\kbd 4588 \definedummyword\key 4589 \definedummyword\math 4590 \definedummyword\option 4591 \definedummyword\pxref 4592 \definedummyword\ref 4593 \definedummyword\samp 4594 \definedummyword\strong 4595 \definedummyword\tie 4596 \definedummyword\uref 4597 \definedummyword\url 4598 \definedummyword\var 4599 \definedummyword\verb 4600 \definedummyword\w 4601 \definedummyword\xref 4602 } 4603 4604 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 4605 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 4606 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 4607 % would be for a given command (usually its argument). 4608 % 4609 \def\indexnofonts{% 4610 % Accent commands should become @asis. 4611 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 4612 % We can just ignore other control letters. 4613 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 4614 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 4615 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent 4616 % 4617 \commondummiesnofonts 4618 % 4619 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 4620 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 4621 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 4622 %\let\tt=\asis 4623 % 4624 \def\ { }% 4625 \def\@{@}% 4626 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 4627 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 4628 % 4629 % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the 4630 % content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings 4631 % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }. 4632 \def\{{|a}% 4633 \def\lbracechar{|a}% 4634 % 4635 \def\}{|b}% 4636 \def\rbracechar{|b}% 4637 % 4638 % Non-English letters. 4639 \def\AA{AA}% 4640 \def\AE{AE}% 4641 \def\DH{DZZ}% 4642 \def\L{L}% 4643 \def\OE{OE}% 4644 \def\O{O}% 4645 \def\TH{ZZZ}% 4646 \def\aa{aa}% 4647 \def\ae{ae}% 4648 \def\dh{dzz}% 4649 \def\exclamdown{!}% 4650 \def\l{l}% 4651 \def\oe{oe}% 4652 \def\ordf{a}% 4653 \def\ordm{o}% 4654 \def\o{o}% 4655 \def\questiondown{?}% 4656 \def\ss{ss}% 4657 \def\th{zzz}% 4658 % 4659 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 4660 \def\TeX{TeX}% 4661 % 4662 % Assorted special characters. 4663 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) 4664 \def\arrow{->}% 4665 \def\bullet{bullet}% 4666 \def\comma{,}% 4667 \def\copyright{copyright}% 4668 \def\dots{...}% 4669 \def\enddots{...}% 4670 \def\equiv{==}% 4671 \def\error{error}% 4672 \def\euro{euro}% 4673 \def\expansion{==>}% 4674 \def\geq{>=}% 4675 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% 4676 \def\guillemetright{>>}% 4677 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% 4678 \def\guilsinglright{>}% 4679 \def\leq{<=}% 4680 \def\minus{-}% 4681 \def\point{.}% 4682 \def\pounds{pounds}% 4683 \def\print{-|}% 4684 \def\quotedblbase{"}% 4685 \def\quotedblleft{"}% 4686 \def\quotedblright{"}% 4687 \def\quoteleft{`}% 4688 \def\quoteright{'}% 4689 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% 4690 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% 4691 \def\result{=>}% 4692 \def\textdegree{o}% 4693 % 4694 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax 4695 \else \indexlquoteignore \fi 4696 % 4697 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 4698 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 4699 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 4700 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 4701 % that starts with \. 4702 % 4703 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 4704 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 4705 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 4706 % 4707 \macrolist 4708 } 4709 4710 % Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us 4711 % ignore left quotes in the sort term. 4712 {\catcode`\`=\active 4713 \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}} 4714 4715 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. 4716 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 4717 4718 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 4719 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 4720 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 4721 4722 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. 4723 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 4724 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 4725 % is with most defuns, which call us directly). 4726 % 4727 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 4728 \iflinks 4729 {% 4730 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 4731 \toks0 = {#2}% 4732 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 4733 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 4734 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 4735 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 4736 \fi 4737 % 4738 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 4739 % 4740 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 4741 }% 4742 \fi 4743 } 4744 4745 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: 4746 % 4747 \def\dosubindwrite{% 4748 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 4749 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 4750 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 4751 \fi 4752 % 4753 % Remember, we are within a group. 4754 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 4755 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now 4756 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. 4757 % 4758 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to 4759 % get the string to sort by. 4760 {\indexnofonts 4761 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion 4762 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% 4763 }% 4764 % 4765 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 4766 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 4767 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 4768 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 4769 % sorted result. 4770 \edef\temp{% 4771 \write\writeto{% 4772 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 4773 }% 4774 \temp 4775 } 4776 4777 % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 4778 % 4779 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 4780 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 4781 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 4782 % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 4783 % sequences like this: 4784 % @end defun 4785 % @tindex whatever 4786 % @defun ... 4787 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 4788 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 4789 % the previous defun. 4790 % 4791 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 4792 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 4793 % 4794 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 4795 % 4796 % But wait, there is a catch there: 4797 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 4798 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 4799 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 4800 % representation of the skip. 4801 % 4802 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 4803 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 4804 % 4805 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 4806 % 4807 \newskip\whatsitskip 4808 \newcount\whatsitpenalty 4809 % 4810 % ..., ready, GO: 4811 % 4812 \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 4813 #1% 4814 \else 4815 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 4816 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 4817 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 4818 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 4819 % 4820 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 4821 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 4822 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 4823 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 4824 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 4825 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4826 \else 4827 \vskip-\whatsitskip 4828 \fi 4829 % 4830 #1% 4831 % 4832 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4833 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 4834 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 4835 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 4836 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 4837 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 4838 % @deffn deffn-whatever 4839 % @vindex index-whatever 4840 % Description. 4841 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 4842 % and the "Description." paragraph. 4843 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 4844 \else 4845 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 4846 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 4847 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 4848 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 4849 \fi 4850 \fi} 4851 4852 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like 4853 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 4854 % or 4855 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 4856 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 4857 % containing these kinds of lines: 4858 % \initial {c} 4859 % before the first topic whose initial is c 4860 % \entry {topic}{pagelist} 4861 % for a topic that is used without subtopics 4862 % \primary {topic} 4863 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 4864 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 4865 % for each subtopic. 4866 4867 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands 4868 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 4869 4870 \def\findex {\fnindex} 4871 \def\kindex {\kyindex} 4872 \def\cindex {\cpindex} 4873 \def\vindex {\vrindex} 4874 \def\tindex {\tpindex} 4875 \def\pindex {\pgindex} 4876 4877 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 4878 {\obeylines % 4879 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 4880 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 4881 4882 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 4883 4884 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 4885 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 4886 % 4887 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 4888 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 4889 % 4890 \smallfonts \rm 4891 \tolerance = 9500 4892 \plainfrenchspacing 4893 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 4894 % 4895 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 4896 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 4897 % \initial {@} 4898 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 4899 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 4900 \catcode`\@ = 11 4901 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s 4902 \ifeof 1 4903 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 4904 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 4905 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 4906 % there is some text. 4907 \putwordIndexNonexistent 4908 \else 4909 % 4910 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 4911 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 4912 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 4913 \read 1 to \temp 4914 \ifeof 1 4915 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 4916 \else 4917 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 4918 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 4919 % to make right now. 4920 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% 4921 \catcode`\\ = 0 4922 \escapechar = `\\ 4923 \begindoublecolumns 4924 \input \jobname.#1s 4925 \enddoublecolumns 4926 \fi 4927 \fi 4928 \closein 1 4929 \endgroup} 4930 4931 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 4932 % Change them to control the appearance of the index. 4933 4934 \def\initial#1{{% 4935 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. 4936 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt 4937 % 4938 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 4939 \removelastskip 4940 % 4941 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 4942 \nobreak 4943 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip 4944 \penalty 0 4945 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip 4946 % 4947 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 4948 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 4949 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 4950 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 4951 % 4952 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 4953 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip 4954 \leftline{\secbf #1}% 4955 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 4956 \nobreak 4957 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 4958 }} 4959 4960 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 4961 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 4962 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 4963 % 4964 % A straightforward implementation would start like this: 4965 % \def\entry#1#2{... 4966 % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to 4967 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- 4968 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. 4969 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. 4970 % --kasal, 21nov03 4971 \def\entry{% 4972 \begingroup 4973 % 4974 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 4975 % affect previous text. 4976 \par 4977 % 4978 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. 4979 \parfillskip = 0in 4980 % 4981 % No extra space above this paragraph. 4982 \parskip = 0in 4983 % 4984 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 4985 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 4986 % 4987 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number 4988 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the 4989 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large 4990 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across 4991 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. 4992 % 4993 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start 4994 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. 4995 \hangindent = 2em 4996 % 4997 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line 4998 % with blank space. 4999 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil 5000 % 5001 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing 5002 % columns. 5003 \vskip 0pt plus1pt 5004 % 5005 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5006 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5007 % titles, for instance. 5008 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5009 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% 5010 % 5011 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5012 \afterassignment\doentry 5013 \let\temp = 5014 } 5015 \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5016 \def\doentry{% 5017 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5018 \noindent 5019 \aftergroup\finishentry 5020 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5021 } 5022 \def\finishentry#1{% 5023 % #1 is the page number. 5024 % 5025 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if 5026 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be 5027 % cursed by a Unix daemon. 5028 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% 5029 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt 5030 \ % 5031 \else 5032 % 5033 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out 5034 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the 5035 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) 5036 \hfil\penalty50 5037 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5038 % 5039 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as 5040 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull 5041 % \hbox ensues. 5042 \ifpdf 5043 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5044 \ \the\toksA 5045 \else 5046 \ #1% 5047 \fi 5048 \fi 5049 \par 5050 \endgroup 5051 } 5052 5053 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5054 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5055 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} 5056 5057 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5058 5059 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 5060 \def\secondary#1#2{{% 5061 \parfillskip=0in 5062 \parskip=0in 5063 \hangindent=1in 5064 \hangafter=1 5065 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 5066 \ifpdf 5067 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5068 \else 5069 #2 5070 \fi 5071 \par 5072 }} 5073 5074 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5075 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5076 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5077 \catcode`\@=11 5078 5079 \newbox\partialpage 5080 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5081 5082 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5083 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5084 \output = {% 5085 % 5086 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 5087 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 5088 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 5089 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 5090 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 5091 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 5092 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 5093 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 5094 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 5095 \fi 5096 % 5097 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5098 % Unvbox the main output page. 5099 \unvbox\PAGE 5100 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5101 }% 5102 }% 5103 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5104 % 5105 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5106 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5107 % 5108 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5109 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5110 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5111 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5112 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5113 % 5114 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5115 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5116 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5117 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5118 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5119 % 5120 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5121 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5122 % been clobbered. 5123 % 5124 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5125 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5126 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5127 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5128 % 5129 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 5130 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 5131 \vsize = 2\vsize 5132 } 5133 5134 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5135 % the last. 5136 % 5137 \def\doublecolumnout{% 5138 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5139 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5140 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5141 % previous page. 5142 \dimen@ = \vsize 5143 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5144 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 5145 % 5146 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5147 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 5148 \onepageout\pagesofar 5149 \unvbox255 5150 \penalty\outputpenalty 5151 } 5152 % 5153 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5154 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5155 \def\pagesofar{% 5156 \unvbox\partialpage 5157 % 5158 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5159 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5160 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5161 } 5162 % 5163 % All done with double columns. 5164 \def\enddoublecolumns{% 5165 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5166 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5167 % following situation: 5168 % 5169 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5170 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5171 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5172 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5173 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5174 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5175 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5176 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5177 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5178 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5179 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5180 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5181 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5182 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5183 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5184 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5185 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5186 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see 5187 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5188 % 5189 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5190 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5191 \penalty0 5192 % 5193 \output = {% 5194 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the 5195 % current page, no automatic page break. 5196 \balancecolumns 5197 % 5198 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, 5199 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output 5200 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5201 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5202 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be 5203 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes 5204 % the output somewhat more palatable.) 5205 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 5206 }% 5207 \eject 5208 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5209 % 5210 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5211 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5212 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 5213 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 5214 \pagegoal = \vsize 5215 } 5216 % 5217 % Called at the end of the double column material. 5218 \def\balancecolumns{% 5219 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5220 \dimen@ = \ht0 5221 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5222 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5223 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 5224 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% 5225 \splittopskip = \topskip 5226 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. 5227 {% 5228 \vbadness = 10000 5229 \loop 5230 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 5231 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 5232 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ 5233 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 5234 \repeat 5235 }% 5236 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% 5237 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% 5238 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% 5239 % 5240 \pagesofar 5241 } 5242 \catcode`\@ = \other 5243 5244 5245 \message{sectioning,} 5246 % Chapters, sections, etc. 5247 5248 % Let's start with @part. 5249 \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 5250 \def\partzzz#1{% 5251 \chapoddpage 5252 \null 5253 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 5254 \begingroup 5255 \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text 5256 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 5257 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 5258 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 5259 \chapoddpage 5260 \endgroup 5261 } 5262 5263 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 5264 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 5265 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 5266 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 5267 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 5268 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 5269 \newcount\chapno 5270 \newcount\secno \secno=0 5271 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 5272 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 5273 5274 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 5275 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 5276 % 5277 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 5278 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 5279 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 5280 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 5281 % 5282 \def\appendixletter{% 5283 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 5284 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 5285 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 5286 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 5287 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 5288 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 5289 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 5290 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 5291 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 5292 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 5293 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 5294 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 5295 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 5296 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 5297 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 5298 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 5299 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 5300 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 5301 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 5302 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 5303 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 5304 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 5305 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 5306 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 5307 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 5308 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 5309 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 5310 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 5311 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 5312 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 5313 \else\char\the\appendixno 5314 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 5315 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 5316 5317 % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 5318 % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 5319 % these. @section does likewise. 5320 \def\thischapter{} 5321 \def\thischapternum{} 5322 \def\thischaptername{} 5323 \def\thissection{} 5324 \def\thissectionnum{} 5325 \def\thissectionname{} 5326 5327 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 5328 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 5329 5330 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 5331 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 5332 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 5333 5334 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 5335 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 5336 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 5337 5338 % we only have subsub. 5339 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 5340 % 5341 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 5342 % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 5343 \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 5344 % 5345 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 5346 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 5347 \def\chapheadtype{N} 5348 5349 % Choose a heading macro 5350 % #1 is heading type 5351 % #2 is heading level 5352 % #3 is text for heading 5353 \def\genhead#1#2#3{% 5354 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 5355 \absseclevel=#2 5356 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 5357 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 5358 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 5359 \absseclevel = 0 5360 \else 5361 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 5362 \absseclevel = 3 5363 \fi 5364 \fi 5365 % The heading type: 5366 \def\headtype{#1}% 5367 \if \headtype U% 5368 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 5369 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 5370 \fi 5371 \else 5372 % Check for appendix sections: 5373 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 5374 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 5375 \else 5376 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 5377 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 5378 \fi\fi 5379 \fi 5380 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 5381 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 5382 \def\headtype{U}% 5383 \else 5384 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 5385 \fi 5386 \fi 5387 % Now print the heading: 5388 \if \headtype U% 5389 \ifcase\absseclevel 5390 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 5391 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 5392 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 5393 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5394 \fi 5395 \else 5396 \if \headtype A% 5397 \ifcase\absseclevel 5398 \appendixzzz{#3}% 5399 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 5400 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 5401 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5402 \fi 5403 \else 5404 \ifcase\absseclevel 5405 \chapterzzz{#3}% 5406 \or \seczzz{#3}% 5407 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 5408 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 5409 \fi 5410 \fi 5411 \fi 5412 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5413 } 5414 5415 % an interface: 5416 \def\numhead{\genhead N} 5417 \def\apphead{\genhead A} 5418 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 5419 5420 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 5421 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 5422 % 5423 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 5424 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 5425 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 5426 % 5427 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 5428 \def\chapterzzz#1{% 5429 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 5430 % as an @include file. 5431 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5432 \global\advance\chapno by 1 5433 % 5434 % Used for \float. 5435 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 5436 \resetallfloatnos 5437 % 5438 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 5439 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 5440 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 5441 % 5442 % Write the actual heading. 5443 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 5444 % 5445 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 5446 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 5447 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5448 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5449 } 5450 5451 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 5452 % 5453 \def\appendixzzz#1{% 5454 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5455 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 5456 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 5457 \resetallfloatnos 5458 % 5459 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 5460 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 5461 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 5462 % 5463 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 5464 % 5465 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 5466 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 5467 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 5468 } 5469 5470 % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 5471 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 5472 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 5473 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 5474 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 5475 % 5476 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 5477 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 5478 \resetallfloatnos 5479 % 5480 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 5481 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 5482 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 5483 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 5484 % to be executed, not expanded). 5485 % 5486 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 5487 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 5488 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 5489 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 5490 % the toc entries.) 5491 \toks0 = {#1}% 5492 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 5493 % 5494 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 5495 % 5496 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 5497 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 5498 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 5499 } 5500 5501 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 5502 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 5503 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break 5504 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. 5505 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 5506 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 5507 \unnmhead0{#1}% 5508 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5509 } 5510 5511 % @top is like @unnumbered. 5512 \let\top\unnumbered 5513 5514 % Sections. 5515 % 5516 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 5517 \def\seczzz#1{% 5518 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5519 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 5520 } 5521 5522 % normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 5523 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 5524 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 5525 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5526 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 5527 } 5528 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection 5529 5530 % normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 5531 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 5532 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 5533 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 5534 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 5535 } 5536 5537 % Subsections. 5538 % 5539 % normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 5540 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 5541 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 5542 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5543 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5544 } 5545 5546 % normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 5547 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 5548 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 5549 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5550 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 5551 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5552 } 5553 5554 % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 5555 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 5556 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 5557 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 5558 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 5559 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 5560 } 5561 5562 % Subsubsections. 5563 % 5564 % normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 5565 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 5566 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5567 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5568 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 5569 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5570 } 5571 5572 % normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 5573 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 5574 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 5575 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5576 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 5577 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5578 } 5579 5580 % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 5581 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 5582 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5583 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5584 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 5585 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5586 } 5587 5588 % These macros control what the section commands do, according 5589 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 5590 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 5591 \let\section = \numberedsec 5592 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5593 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5594 5595 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 5596 5597 \def\majorheading{% 5598 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 5599 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 5600 } 5601 5602 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 5603 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 5604 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 5605 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 5606 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5607 } 5608 5609 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 5610 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5611 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5612 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5613 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5614 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5615 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5616 5617 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 5618 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 5619 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 5620 5621 % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 5622 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 5623 5624 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 5625 \newskip\chapheadingskip 5626 5627 % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 5628 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 5629 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 5630 % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 5631 % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 5632 % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 5633 \def\chapoddpage{% 5634 \chappager 5635 \ifodd\pageno \else 5636 \begingroup 5637 \headingsoff 5638 \null 5639 \chappager 5640 \endgroup 5641 \fi 5642 } 5643 5644 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 5645 5646 \def\CHAPPAGoff{% 5647 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5648 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 5649 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 5650 5651 \def\CHAPPAGon{% 5652 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5653 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 5654 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 5655 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 5656 5657 \def\CHAPPAGodd{% 5658 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 5659 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 5660 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 5661 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 5662 5663 \CHAPPAGon 5664 5665 % Chapter opening. 5666 % 5667 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 5668 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 5669 % 5670 % To test against our argument. 5671 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 5672 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 5673 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 5674 % 5675 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 5676 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5677 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5678 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5679 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5680 \gdef\thissection{}}% 5681 % 5682 \def\temptype{#2}% 5683 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5684 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5685 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 5686 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5687 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5688 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 5689 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5690 \toks0={#1}% 5691 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5692 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5693 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 5694 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 5695 % commands in some of the translations. 5696 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 5697 \noexpand\thischapternum: 5698 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5699 }% 5700 \else 5701 \toks0={#1}% 5702 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5703 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5704 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 5705 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 5706 % commands in some of the translations. 5707 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 5708 \noexpand\thischapternum: 5709 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5710 }% 5711 \fi\fi\fi 5712 % 5713 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5714 % the preceding space. 5715 \safewhatsit\domark 5716 % 5717 % Insert the chapter heading break. 5718 \pchapsepmacro 5719 % 5720 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5721 % between here and the heading. 5722 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5723 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5724 \domark 5725 % 5726 {% 5727 \chapfonts \rmisbold 5728 % 5729 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 5730 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 5731 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 5732 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5733 % 5734 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 5735 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 5736 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5737 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5738 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 5739 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5740 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 5741 \def\toctype{omit}% 5742 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5743 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 5744 \def\toctype{app}% 5745 \else 5746 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 5747 \def\toctype{numchap}% 5748 \fi\fi\fi 5749 % 5750 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 5751 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 5752 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 5753 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 5754 % 5755 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 5756 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 5757 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 5758 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 5759 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 5760 \donoderef{#2}% 5761 % 5762 % Typeset the actual heading. 5763 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 5764 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 5765 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 5766 }% 5767 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 5768 \nobreak 5769 } 5770 5771 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 5772 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5773 \def\centerparameters{% 5774 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 5775 \leftskip = \rightskip 5776 \parfillskip = 0pt 5777 } 5778 5779 5780 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not 5781 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. 5782 % 5783 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} 5784 % 5785 \def\unnchfopen #1{% 5786 \chapoddpage 5787 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 5788 \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak 5789 } 5790 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts 5791 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% 5792 \par\penalty 5000 % 5793 } 5794 \def\centerchfopen #1{% 5795 \chapoddpage 5796 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}% 5797 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 5798 } 5799 \def\CHAPFopen{% 5800 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen 5801 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} 5802 5803 5804 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 5805 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 5806 % 5807 \newskip\secheadingskip 5808 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 5809 5810 % Subsection titles. 5811 \newskip\subsecheadingskip 5812 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 5813 5814 % Subsubsection titles. 5815 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 5816 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 5817 5818 5819 % Print any size, any type, section title. 5820 % 5821 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is 5822 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the 5823 % section number. 5824 % 5825 \def\seckeyword{sec} 5826 % 5827 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 5828 {% 5829 \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment. 5830 % 5831 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 5832 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold 5833 % 5834 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 5835 \def\temptype{#3}% 5836 % 5837 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5838 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5839 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5840 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5841 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5842 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 5843 \fi 5844 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5845 % Don't redefine \thissection. 5846 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5847 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5848 \toks0={#1}% 5849 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5850 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5851 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5852 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 5853 % commands in some of the translations. 5854 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 5855 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5856 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5857 }% 5858 \fi 5859 \else 5860 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5861 \toks0={#1}% 5862 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5863 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5864 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5865 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 5866 % commands in some of the translations. 5867 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 5868 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5869 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5870 }% 5871 \fi 5872 \fi\fi\fi 5873 % 5874 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 5875 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 5876 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 5877 \par 5878 % 5879 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5880 % the preceding space. 5881 \safewhatsit\domark 5882 % 5883 % Insert space above the heading. 5884 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 5885 % 5886 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5887 % between here and the heading. 5888 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5889 \domark 5890 % 5891 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 5892 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5893 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5894 \def\toctype{unn}% 5895 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5896 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5897 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 5898 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 5899 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5900 \def\toctype{omit}% 5901 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 5902 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5903 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5904 \def\toctype{app}% 5905 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5906 \else 5907 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5908 \def\toctype{num}% 5909 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5910 \fi\fi\fi 5911 % 5912 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 5913 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 5914 % 5915 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 5916 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 5917 \donoderef{#3}% 5918 % 5919 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 5920 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 5921 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 5922 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 5923 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 5924 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 5925 \nobreak 5926 % 5927 % Output the actual section heading. 5928 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 5929 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 5930 \unhbox0 #1}% 5931 }% 5932 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 5933 % Don't allow stretch, though. 5934 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 5935 % 5936 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 5937 % was followed by glue. 5938 \nobreak 5939 % 5940 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 5941 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 5942 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 5943 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 5944 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 5945 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 5946 \vskip-\parskip 5947 % 5948 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 5949 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 5950 % and do the needful. 5951 \penalty 10001 5952 } 5953 5954 5955 \message{toc,} 5956 % Table of contents. 5957 \newwrite\tocfile 5958 5959 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 5960 % Called from @chapter, etc. 5961 % 5962 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 5963 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 5964 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 5965 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 5966 % destination to jump to. 5967 % 5968 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 5969 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 5970 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 5971 % table of contents chapter openings themselves. 5972 % 5973 \newif\iftocfileopened 5974 \def\omitkeyword{omit}% 5975 % 5976 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 5977 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 5978 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 5979 \iftocfileopened\else 5980 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 5981 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 5982 \fi 5983 % 5984 \iflinks 5985 {\atdummies 5986 \edef\temp{% 5987 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 5988 \temp 5989 }% 5990 \fi 5991 \fi 5992 % 5993 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 5994 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 5995 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 5996 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 5997 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 5998 % `1', and two named `2'. 5999 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi 6000 } 6001 6002 6003 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6004 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6005 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6006 % 6007 \def\activecatcodes{% 6008 \catcode`\"=\active 6009 \catcode`\$=\active 6010 \catcode`\<=\active 6011 \catcode`\>=\active 6012 \catcode`\\=\active 6013 \catcode`\^=\active 6014 \catcode`\_=\active 6015 \catcode`\|=\active 6016 \catcode`\~=\active 6017 } 6018 6019 6020 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6021 \def\readtocfile{% 6022 \setupdatafile 6023 \activecatcodes 6024 \input \tocreadfilename 6025 } 6026 6027 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6028 \newcount\savepageno 6029 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6030 6031 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6032 % 6033 \def\startcontents#1{% 6034 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6035 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 6036 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 6037 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege (a] matematik.su.se> 6038 \contentsalignmacro 6039 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6040 % 6041 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6042 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6043 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6044 % 6045 \savepageno = \pageno 6046 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6047 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6048 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6049 % 6050 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6051 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6052 } 6053 6054 % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6055 % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6056 % 6057 \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6058 6059 % Normal (long) toc. 6060 % 6061 \def\contents{% 6062 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6063 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6064 \ifeof 1 \else 6065 \readtocfile 6066 \fi 6067 \vfill \eject 6068 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6069 \ifeof 1 \else 6070 \pdfmakeoutlines 6071 \fi 6072 \closein 1 6073 \endgroup 6074 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6075 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6076 } 6077 6078 % And just the chapters. 6079 \def\summarycontents{% 6080 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6081 % 6082 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6083 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6084 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6085 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6086 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6087 \secfonts 6088 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6089 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6090 \rm 6091 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6092 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6093 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6094 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6095 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6096 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6097 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6098 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6099 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6100 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6101 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6102 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6103 \ifeof 1 \else 6104 \readtocfile 6105 \fi 6106 \closein 1 6107 \vfill \eject 6108 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6109 \endgroup 6110 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6111 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6112 } 6113 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6114 6115 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6116 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6117 % 6118 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6119 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6120 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6121 % But use \hss just in case. 6122 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6123 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6124 % 6125 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6126 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6127 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6128 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6129 % there are before deciding ... 6130 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6131 } 6132 6133 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6134 % The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6135 % The last argument is the page number. 6136 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6137 6138 % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6139 % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6140 % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6141 \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6142 \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}} 6143 % 6144 % Parts, in the short toc. 6145 \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6146 \penalty-300 6147 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6148 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6149 } 6150 6151 % Chapters, in the main contents. 6152 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6153 % 6154 % Chapters, in the short toc. 6155 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6156 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6157 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6158 } 6159 6160 % Appendices, in the main contents. 6161 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6162 % 6163 \def\appendixbox#1{% 6164 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6165 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6166 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6167 % 6168 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6169 6170 % Unnumbered chapters. 6171 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6172 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6173 6174 % Sections. 6175 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6176 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6177 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6178 6179 % Subsections. 6180 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6181 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6182 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6183 6184 % And subsubsections. 6185 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6186 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6187 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6188 6189 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6190 % Same as \defaultparindent. 6191 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6192 6193 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6194 % page number. 6195 % 6196 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 6197 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 6198 \def\dochapentry#1#2{% 6199 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 6200 \begingroup 6201 \chapentryfonts 6202 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6203 \endgroup 6204 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 6205 } 6206 6207 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6208 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 6209 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6210 \endgroup} 6211 6212 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6213 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 6214 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6215 \endgroup} 6216 6217 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6218 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 6219 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6220 \endgroup} 6221 6222 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 6223 \let\tocentry = \entry 6224 6225 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 6226 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 6227 6228 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6229 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6230 6231 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 6232 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 6233 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6234 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6235 6236 6237 \message{environments,} 6238 % @foo ... @end foo. 6239 6240 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 6241 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 6242 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 6243 6244 \envdef\tex{% 6245 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 6246 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 6247 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 6248 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 6249 \catcode `\%=14 6250 \catcode `\+=\other 6251 \catcode `\"=\other 6252 \catcode `\|=\other 6253 \catcode `\<=\other 6254 \catcode `\>=\other 6255 \catcode`\`=\other 6256 \catcode`\'=\other 6257 \escapechar=`\\ 6258 % 6259 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 6260 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 6261 \mathactive 6262 % 6263 \let\b=\ptexb 6264 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 6265 \let\c=\ptexc 6266 \let\,=\ptexcomma 6267 \let\.=\ptexdot 6268 \let\dots=\ptexdots 6269 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 6270 \let\!=\ptexexclam 6271 \let\i=\ptexi 6272 \let\indent=\ptexindent 6273 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 6274 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 6275 \let\+=\tabalign 6276 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 6277 \let\/=\ptexslash 6278 \let\*=\ptexstar 6279 \let\t=\ptext 6280 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer 6281 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 6282 % 6283 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 6284 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 6285 \def\@{@}% 6286 } 6287 % There is no need to define \Etex. 6288 6289 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 6290 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 6291 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 6292 6293 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 6294 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 6295 6296 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 6297 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 6298 % have any width. 6299 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 6300 6301 % This space is always present above and below environments. 6302 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 6303 6304 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 6305 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 6306 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 6307 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 6308 % 6309 \def\aboveenvbreak{{% 6310 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 6311 % \sectionheading, q.v. 6312 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 6313 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 6314 \endgraf 6315 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 6316 \removelastskip 6317 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 6318 % or better ... 6319 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 6320 \vskip\envskipamount 6321 \fi 6322 \fi 6323 }} 6324 6325 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak 6326 6327 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 6328 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 6329 \let\nonarrowing=\relax 6330 6331 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 6332 % environment contents. 6333 \font\circle=lcircle10 6334 \newdimen\circthick 6335 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 6336 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 6337 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 6338 % 6339 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 6340 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 6341 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 6342 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 6343 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 6344 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 6345 \hskip\rskip}} 6346 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 6347 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 6348 \hskip\rskip}} 6349 % 6350 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 6351 6352 \envdef\cartouche{% 6353 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 6354 \startsavinginserts 6355 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 6356 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 6357 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 6358 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 6359 \cartouter=\hsize 6360 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 6361 % side, and for 6pt waste from 6362 % each corner char, and rule thickness 6363 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 6364 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. 6365 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6366 % 6367 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 6368 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 6369 % collide with the section heading. 6370 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 6371 % 6372 \vbox\bgroup 6373 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 6374 \carttop 6375 \hbox\bgroup 6376 \hskip\lskip 6377 \vrule\kern3pt 6378 \vbox\bgroup 6379 \kern3pt 6380 \hsize=\cartinner 6381 \baselineskip=\normbskip 6382 \lineskip=\normlskip 6383 \parskip=\normpskip 6384 \vskip -\parskip 6385 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 6386 } 6387 \def\Ecartouche{% 6388 \ifhmode\par\fi 6389 \kern3pt 6390 \egroup 6391 \kern3pt\vrule 6392 \hskip\rskip 6393 \egroup 6394 \cartbot 6395 \egroup 6396 \checkinserts 6397 } 6398 6399 6400 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 6401 % inside a group. 6402 \newdimen\nonfillparindent 6403 \def\nonfillstart{% 6404 \aboveenvbreak 6405 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy 6406 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 6407 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 6408 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 6409 \parskip = 0pt 6410 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 6411 % the normal \indent. 6412 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 6413 \parindent = 0pt 6414 \let\indent\nonfillindent 6415 % 6416 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 6417 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6418 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 6419 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 6420 \else 6421 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 6422 \fi 6423 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 6424 } 6425 6426 \begingroup 6427 \obeyspaces 6428 % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 6429 % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 6430 % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 6431 % @indent. 6432 \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 6433 \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 6434 \ifx\temp % 6435 \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 6436 \else% 6437 \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 6438 \fi% 6439 }% 6440 \endgroup 6441 \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 6442 \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 6443 6444 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 6445 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 6446 % This affects the following displayed environments: 6447 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp 6448 % 6449 \def\smallword{small} 6450 \def\nosmallword{nosmall} 6451 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax 6452 \def\setnormaldispenv{% 6453 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 6454 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 6455 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 6456 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 6457 % to change the fonts afterward. 6458 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 6459 \smallexamplefonts \rm 6460 \fi 6461 } 6462 \def\setsmalldispenv{% 6463 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 6464 \else 6465 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 6466 \smallexamplefonts \rm 6467 \fi 6468 } 6469 6470 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 6471 % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 6472 \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 6473 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 6474 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 6475 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 6476 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 6477 } 6478 6479 % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 6480 \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 6481 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 6482 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 6483 } 6484 % 6485 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 6486 % @example: same as @lisp. 6487 % 6488 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 6489 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 6490 % 6491 \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 6492 \nonfillstart 6493 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 6494 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 6495 \gobble % eat return 6496 } 6497 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 6498 % 6499 \makedispenvdef{display}{% 6500 \nonfillstart 6501 \gobble 6502 } 6503 6504 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 6505 % 6506 \makedispenvdef{format}{% 6507 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6508 \nonfillstart 6509 \gobble 6510 } 6511 6512 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 6513 \envdef\flushleft{% 6514 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6515 \nonfillstart 6516 \gobble 6517 } 6518 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 6519 6520 % @flushright. 6521 % 6522 \envdef\flushright{% 6523 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6524 \nonfillstart 6525 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 6526 \gobble 6527 } 6528 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 6529 6530 6531 % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 6532 % justification. From plain.tex. 6533 \envdef\raggedright{% 6534 \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 6535 } 6536 \let\Eraggedright\par 6537 6538 \envdef\raggedleft{% 6539 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 6540 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 6541 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 6542 % badness reporting. 6543 } 6544 \let\Eraggedleft\par 6545 6546 \envdef\raggedcenter{% 6547 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 6548 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 6549 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 6550 % badness reporting. 6551 } 6552 \let\Eraggedcenter\par 6553 6554 6555 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 6556 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 6557 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 6558 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 6559 % 6560 \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 6561 % 6562 \def\quotationstart{% 6563 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 6564 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6565 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 6566 \fi 6567 \parsearg\quotationlabel 6568 } 6569 6570 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 6571 % doing normal filling. 6572 % 6573 \def\Equotation{% 6574 \par 6575 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 6576 % indent a bit. 6577 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 6578 \fi 6579 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 6580 } 6581 \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 6582 6583 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 6584 \def\quotationlabel#1{% 6585 \def\temp{#1}% 6586 \ifx\temp\empty \else 6587 {\bf #1: }% 6588 \fi 6589 } 6590 6591 % @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 6592 % has no optional argument. 6593 % 6594 \makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 6595 % 6596 \def\indentedblockstart{% 6597 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 6598 \parindent=0pt 6599 % 6600 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 6601 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 6602 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 6603 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 6604 \else 6605 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 6606 \fi 6607 } 6608 6609 % Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 6610 % 6611 \def\Eindentedblock{% 6612 \par 6613 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 6614 } 6615 \def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 6616 6617 6618 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 6619 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 6620 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 6621 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke (a] gnu.org 6622 % 6623 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 6624 % 6625 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 6626 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 6627 % verbatim line. 6628 \def\dospecials{% 6629 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 6630 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 6631 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 6632 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 6633 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 6634 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 6635 %\do\`\do\'% 6636 } 6637 % 6638 % [Knuth] p. 380 6639 \def\uncatcodespecials{% 6640 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 6641 % 6642 % Setup for the @verb command. 6643 % 6644 % Eight spaces for a tab 6645 \begingroup 6646 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6647 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 6648 \endgroup 6649 % 6650 \def\setupverb{% 6651 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6652 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 6653 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 6654 \tabeightspaces 6655 % Respect line breaks, 6656 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6657 % make each space count 6658 % must do in this order: 6659 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6660 } 6661 6662 % Setup for the @verbatim environment 6663 % 6664 % Real tab expansion. 6665 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 6666 % 6667 % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 6668 % tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, 6669 % or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the 6670 % entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before 6671 % it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands 6672 % (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. 6673 \newbox\verbbox 6674 \def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 6675 % 6676 \begingroup 6677 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6678 \gdef\tabexpand{% 6679 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6680 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 6681 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 6682 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 6683 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 6684 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 6685 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox 6686 }% 6687 } 6688 \endgroup 6689 6690 % start the verbatim environment. 6691 \def\setupverbatim{% 6692 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6693 \nonfillstart 6694 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6695 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would 6696 % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. 6697 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% 6698 \tabexpand 6699 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 6700 % Respect line breaks, 6701 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6702 % make each space count. 6703 % Must do in this order: 6704 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6705 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 6706 } 6707 6708 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 6709 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 6710 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 6711 % 6712 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 6713 % 6714 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 6715 \begingroup 6716 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 6717 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 6718 \endgroup 6719 % 6720 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 6721 % 6722 % 6723 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 6724 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 6725 % 6726 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 6727 % 6728 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 6729 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 6730 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 6731 % 6732 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 6733 % 6734 \begingroup 6735 \catcode`\ =\active 6736 \obeylines % 6737 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 6738 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 6739 % line in the output. 6740 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 6741 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 6742 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 6743 \endgroup 6744 % 6745 \envdef\verbatim{% 6746 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 6747 } 6748 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 6749 6750 6751 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 6752 % 6753 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 6754 % 6755 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 6756 {% 6757 \makevalueexpandable 6758 \setupverbatim 6759 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 6760 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 6761 \input #1 6762 \afterenvbreak 6763 }% 6764 } 6765 6766 % @copying ... @end copying. 6767 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 6768 % 6769 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 6770 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 6771 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 6772 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 6773 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 6774 % possible is very desirable. 6775 % 6776 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 6777 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 6778 % 6779 \def\insertcopying{% 6780 \begingroup 6781 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 6782 \scanexp\copyingtext 6783 \endgroup 6784 } 6785 6786 6787 \message{defuns,} 6788 % @defun etc. 6789 6790 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 6791 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 6792 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 6793 \newcount\defunpenalty 6794 6795 % Start the processing of @deffn: 6796 \def\startdefun{% 6797 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 6798 \medbreak 6799 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 6800 % following @def command, see below. 6801 \else 6802 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 6803 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 6804 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 6805 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 6806 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 6807 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 6808 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 6809 % 6810 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 6811 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 6812 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 6813 % @def command. 6814 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6815 % 6816 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 6817 % But do insert the glue. 6818 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 6819 \fi 6820 % 6821 \parindent=0in 6822 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 6823 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6824 } 6825 6826 \def\dodefunx#1{% 6827 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 6828 \checkenv#1% 6829 % 6830 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 6831 % It's not a great place, though. 6832 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6833 % 6834 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 6835 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 6836 } 6837 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 6838 6839 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 6840 % 6841 \def\printdefunline#1#2{% 6842 \begingroup 6843 % call \deffnheader: 6844 #1#2 \endheader 6845 % common ending: 6846 \interlinepenalty = 10000 6847 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 6848 \endgraf 6849 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 6850 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 6851 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 6852 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 6853 \checkparencounts 6854 \endgroup 6855 } 6856 6857 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 6858 6859 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 6860 % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 6861 % 6862 \def\makedefun#1{% 6863 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 6864 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 6865 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 6866 \temp 6867 } 6868 6869 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader 6870 % 6871 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 6872 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 6873 % 6874 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 6875 \envdef#1{% 6876 \startdefun 6877 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 6878 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 6879 }% 6880 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 6881 \def#3% 6882 } 6883 6884 \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 6885 \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 6886 6887 % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 6888 % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 6889 % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 6890 % 6891 \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 6892 \def\temp{#1}% 6893 \ifx\temp\onword 6894 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 6895 = \empty 6896 \else\ifx\temp\offword 6897 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 6898 = \relax 6899 \else 6900 \errhelp = \EMsimple 6901 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 6902 must be on|off}% 6903 \fi\fi 6904 } 6905 6906 % Untyped functions: 6907 6908 % @deffn category name args 6909 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 6910 6911 % @deffn category class name args 6912 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6913 6914 % \defopon {category on}class name args 6915 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6916 6917 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 6918 % 6919 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 6920 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 6921 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 6922 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 6923 } 6924 6925 % Typed functions: 6926 6927 % @deftypefn category type name args 6928 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 6929 6930 % @deftypeop category class type name args 6931 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6932 6933 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 6934 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6935 6936 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 6937 % 6938 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6939 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6940 \doingtypefntrue 6941 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6942 } 6943 6944 % Typed variables: 6945 6946 % @deftypevr category type var args 6947 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 6948 6949 % @deftypecv category class type var args 6950 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6951 6952 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 6953 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6954 6955 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 6956 % 6957 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6958 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6959 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6960 } 6961 6962 % Untyped variables: 6963 6964 % @defvr category var args 6965 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 6966 6967 % @defcv category class var args 6968 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6969 6970 % \defcvof {category of}class var args 6971 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 6972 6973 % Types: 6974 6975 % @deftp category name args 6976 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 6977 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 6978 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 6979 } 6980 6981 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 6982 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6983 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 6984 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 6985 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6986 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6987 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 6988 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6989 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 6990 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 6991 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6992 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6993 6994 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 6995 % #1 is the category, such as "Function". 6996 % #2 is the return type, if any. 6997 % #3 is the function name. 6998 % 6999 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7000 % 7001 \def\defname#1#2#3{% 7002 \par 7003 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7004 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7005 % 7006 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7007 % on a line by itself. 7008 \rettypeownlinefalse 7009 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7010 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7011 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7012 \rettypeownlinetrue 7013 \fi 7014 \fi 7015 % 7016 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7017 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7018 % just below it. 7019 \def\temp{#1}% 7020 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7021 % 7022 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7023 % least two. 7024 \tempnum = 2 7025 % 7026 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7027 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7028 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7029 % 7030 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7031 \ifrettypeownline 7032 \advance\tempnum by 1 7033 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7034 \else 7035 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7036 \fi 7037 % 7038 % The continuations: 7039 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7040 % 7041 % The final paragraph shape: 7042 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7043 % 7044 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7045 \noindent 7046 \hbox to 0pt{% 7047 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7048 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7049 \kern\leftskip 7050 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7051 }% 7052 % 7053 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7054 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7055 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7056 {% 7057 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7058 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7059 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7060 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7061 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7062 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7063 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7064 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7065 \df \tt 7066 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7067 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7068 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7069 \ifrettypeownline 7070 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7071 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7072 \else 7073 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7074 \fi 7075 \fi % no return type 7076 #3% output function name 7077 }% 7078 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm 7079 % 7080 \boldbrax 7081 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7082 } 7083 7084 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7085 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7086 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7087 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7088 % 7089 \def\defunargs#1{% 7090 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7091 % tt for the names. 7092 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7093 % 7094 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7095 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7096 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7097 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7098 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7099 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7100 #1% 7101 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7102 } 7103 7104 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7105 % 7106 \def\activeparens{% 7107 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7108 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7109 \catcode`\&=\active 7110 } 7111 7112 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7113 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7114 7115 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7116 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7117 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7118 { 7119 \activeparens 7120 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7121 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7122 \global\let& = \& 7123 7124 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7125 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7126 } 7127 7128 \newcount\parencount 7129 7130 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7131 \newif\ifampseen 7132 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7133 7134 \def\parenfont{% 7135 \ifampseen 7136 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7137 % otherwise use the default font. 7138 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7139 \else 7140 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7141 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7142 \sf 7143 \fi 7144 } 7145 \def\infirstlevel#1{% 7146 \ifampseen 7147 \ifnum\parencount=1 7148 #1% 7149 \fi 7150 \fi 7151 } 7152 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7153 7154 \def\opnr{% 7155 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7156 {\parenfont(}% 7157 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7158 } 7159 \def\clnr{% 7160 {\parenfont)}% 7161 \infirstlevel \sl 7162 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7163 } 7164 7165 \newcount\brackcount 7166 \def\lbrb{% 7167 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7168 {\bf[}% 7169 } 7170 \def\rbrb{% 7171 {\bf]}% 7172 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 7173 } 7174 7175 \def\checkparencounts{% 7176 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 7177 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 7178 } 7179 % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 7180 % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 7181 \def\badparencount{% 7182 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 7183 \global\parencount=0 7184 } 7185 \def\badbrackcount{% 7186 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 7187 \global\brackcount=0 7188 } 7189 7190 7191 \message{macros,} 7192 % @macro. 7193 7194 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 7195 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 7196 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7197 \newwrite\macscribble 7198 \def\scantokens#1{% 7199 \toks0={#1}% 7200 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 7201 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 7202 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 7203 \input \jobname.tmp 7204 } 7205 \fi 7206 7207 \def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup 7208 \newlinechar`\^^M 7209 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces 7210 % 7211 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex 7212 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active 7213 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had 7214 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears 7215 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 7216 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ 7217 % 7218 % ... and for \example: 7219 \spaceisspace 7220 % 7221 % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as 7222 % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not 7223 % eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two 7224 % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX 7225 % would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in 7226 % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and 7227 % line-oriented commands. 7228 % 7229 \scantokens{#1\empty}% 7230 \endgroup} 7231 7232 \def\scanexp#1{% 7233 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% 7234 \temp 7235 } 7236 7237 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 7238 \newtoks\macname % Macro name 7239 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 7240 7241 % List of all defined macros in the form 7242 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... 7243 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 7244 % if there is a need. 7245 \def\macrolist{} 7246 7247 % Add the macro to \macrolist 7248 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 7249 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 7250 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% 7251 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 7252 } 7253 7254 % Utility routines. 7255 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 7256 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 7257 % (except of course we have to play expansion games). 7258 % 7259 \def\cslet#1#2{% 7260 \expandafter\let 7261 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 7262 \csname#2\endcsname 7263 } 7264 7265 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 7266 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 7267 {\catcode`\@=11 7268 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 7269 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 7270 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 7271 \def\unbrace#1{#1} 7272 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 7273 } 7274 7275 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 7276 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 7277 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 7278 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 7279 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 7280 } 7281 7282 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 7283 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 7284 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 7285 % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 7286 % 7287 % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 7288 % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 7289 % confine the change to the current group. 7290 % 7291 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 7292 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 7293 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 7294 % 7295 \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 7296 \catcode`\"=\other 7297 \catcode`\+=\other 7298 \catcode`\<=\other 7299 \catcode`\>=\other 7300 \catcode`\@=\other 7301 \catcode`\^=\other 7302 \catcode`\_=\other 7303 \catcode`\|=\other 7304 \catcode`\~=\other 7305 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi 7306 } 7307 7308 \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 7309 \scanctxt 7310 \catcode`\\=\other 7311 \catcode`\^^M=\other 7312 } 7313 7314 \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 7315 \scanctxt 7316 \catcode`\{=\other 7317 \catcode`\}=\other 7318 \catcode`\^^M=\other 7319 \usembodybackslash 7320 } 7321 7322 \def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations 7323 \scanctxt 7324 \catcode`\\=0 7325 } 7326 % why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes" 7327 % for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands" 7328 % that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document. 7329 % 7330 % We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for 7331 % this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we 7332 % define for @math can't be used with @macro calls): 7333 % 7334 \def\\{\normalbackslash}% 7335 % 7336 % We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does. 7337 % But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a 7338 % cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead. 7339 % 7340 % \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind. 7341 7342 7343 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 7344 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 7345 % where N is the macro parameter number. 7346 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 7347 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 7348 % 7349 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 7350 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 7351 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 7352 } 7353 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 7354 7355 \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 7356 7357 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 7358 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 7359 7360 \def\macroxxx#1{% 7361 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 7362 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 7363 \paramno=0\relax 7364 \else 7365 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 7366 \if\paramno>256\relax 7367 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7368 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7369 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 7370 \fi 7371 \fi 7372 \fi 7373 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 7374 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 7375 \else 7376 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 7377 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 7378 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 7379 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 7380 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 7381 \fi 7382 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 7383 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 7384 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 7385 \fi} 7386 7387 \parseargdef\unmacro{% 7388 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 7389 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 7390 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 7391 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 7392 \begingroup 7393 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 7394 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo 7395 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 7396 \endgroup 7397 \else 7398 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 7399 \fi 7400 } 7401 7402 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 7403 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 7404 % 7405 \def\unmacrodo#1{% 7406 \ifx #1\relax 7407 % remove this 7408 \else 7409 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% 7410 \fi 7411 } 7412 7413 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a 7414 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 7415 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 7416 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 7417 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 7418 \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 7419 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 7420 7421 % For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names. 7422 \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 7423 \catcode `@=11\relax 7424 7425 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist 7426 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH 7427 % in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded. If 7428 % there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 7429 % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 7430 % defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 7431 % 7432 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 7433 % 7434 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. 7435 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something 7436 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine 7437 % it to # just before using the token list produced. 7438 % 7439 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before 7440 % the macro is used. 7441 % 7442 % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 7443 % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 7444 % processed again to replace the arguments. 7445 % 7446 % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 7447 % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 7448 % the catcode regime underwhich the body was input). 7449 % 7450 % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 7451 % arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an 7452 % error is produced. 7453 \def\parsemargdef#1;{% 7454 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 7455 \let\hash\relax 7456 \let\xeatspaces\relax 7457 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 7458 % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 7459 % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 7460 % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 7461 % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 7462 % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 7463 % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 7464 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 7465 \paramno0\relax 7466 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 7467 \fi 7468 } 7469 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 7470 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 7471 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 7472 \advance\paramno by 1 7473 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 7474 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 7475 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 7476 \fi\next} 7477 7478 \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 7479 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 7480 \else 7481 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 7482 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 7483 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 7484 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 7485 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 7486 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 7487 % \xdef . 7488 \expandafter\edef\tempa 7489 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 7490 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 7491 \fi\next} 7492 7493 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. 7494 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 7495 % 7496 7497 \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode 7498 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% 7499 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 7500 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% 7501 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 7502 \catcode `\@=11\relax 7503 7504 \let\endargs@\relax 7505 \let\nil@\relax 7506 \def\nilm@{\nil@}% 7507 \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 7508 7509 % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 7510 % definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros 7511 % macarg.ARGNAME 7512 % 7513 % #1 is the macro name 7514 % #2 is the list of argument names 7515 % #3 is the list of argument values 7516 \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 7517 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 7518 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 7519 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 7520 \def\macroname{#1}% 7521 \begingroup 7522 \macroargctxt 7523 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 7524 \def\@tempa{#3}% 7525 \ifx\@tempa\empty 7526 \setemptyargvalues@ 7527 \else 7528 \getargvals@@ 7529 \fi 7530 } 7531 7532 % 7533 \def\getargvals@@{% 7534 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 7535 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 7536 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 7537 \else 7538 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7539 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 7540 \fi 7541 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 7542 \else 7543 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 7544 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 7545 % macros to empty. 7546 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 7547 \else 7548 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 7549 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 7550 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 7551 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 7552 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 7553 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 7554 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 7555 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 7556 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 7557 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 7558 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 7559 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 7560 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 7561 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 7562 \let\next\getargvals@@ 7563 \fi 7564 \fi 7565 \next 7566 } 7567 7568 \def\push@#1#2{% 7569 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 7570 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 7571 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 7572 \expandafter#1#2}% 7573 } 7574 7575 % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 7576 % in macro \@tempa 7577 \def\macvalstoargs@{% 7578 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 7579 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 7580 % values into respective token registers. 7581 % 7582 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 7583 \begingroup 7584 \paramno0\relax 7585 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 7586 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 7587 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 7588 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 7589 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 7590 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 7591 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 7592 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 7593 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 7594 % group. 7595 \expandafter 7596 \endgroup 7597 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 7598 } 7599 7600 \def\macargexpandinbody@{% 7601 %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 7602 \expandafter 7603 \endgroup 7604 \macargdeflist@ 7605 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 7606 % is in \@tempa . 7607 \macvalstoargs@ 7608 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 7609 % with \@tempb . 7610 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 7611 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 7612 % \egroup . 7613 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 7614 \let\@tempc\relax 7615 \else 7616 \let\@tempc\egroup 7617 \fi 7618 % And now we do the real job: 7619 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 7620 \@tempd 7621 } 7622 7623 \def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 7624 \if#1;\let\next\relax 7625 \else 7626 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 7627 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 7628 % alias \@tempb . 7629 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 7630 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 7631 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 7632 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 7633 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 7634 \fi 7635 \next 7636 } 7637 7638 % Save the token stack pointer into macro #1 7639 \def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}} 7640 % Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1 7641 \def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax} 7642 % newtoks that can be used non \outer . 7643 \def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi} 7644 7645 % Tailing missing arguments are set to empty 7646 \def\setemptyargvalues@{% 7647 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 7648 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 7649 \else 7650 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 7651 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 7652 \fi 7653 \next 7654 } 7655 7656 \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 7657 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 7658 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 7659 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 7660 \def\paramlist{#2}% 7661 } 7662 7663 % #1 is the element target macro 7664 % #2 is the list macro 7665 % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 7666 \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 7667 \def#1{#3}% 7668 \def#2{#4}% 7669 } 7670 \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 7671 \long\def#1{#3}% 7672 \long\def#2{#4}% 7673 } 7674 7675 % This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and 7676 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 7677 % Much magic with \expandafter here. 7678 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 7679 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. 7680 % 7681 \def\defmacro{% 7682 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 7683 \ifrecursive 7684 \ifcase\paramno 7685 % 0 7686 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7687 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7688 \or % 1 7689 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7690 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7691 \noexpand\braceorline 7692 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 7693 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 7694 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7695 \else 7696 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9 7697 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7698 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7699 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 7700 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 7701 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 7702 \expandafter\expandafter 7703 \expandafter\xdef 7704 \expandafter\expandafter 7705 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 7706 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 7707 \else % 10 or more 7708 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7709 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 7710 }% 7711 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp 7712 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 7713 \fi 7714 \fi 7715 \else 7716 \ifcase\paramno 7717 % 0 7718 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7719 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7720 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7721 \or % 1 7722 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7723 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7724 \noexpand\braceorline 7725 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 7726 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 7727 \egroup 7728 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7729 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7730 \else % at most 9 7731 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 7732 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7733 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 7734 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 7735 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 7736 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 7737 \expandafter\expandafter 7738 \expandafter\xdef 7739 \expandafter\expandafter 7740 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 7741 \paramlist{% 7742 \egroup 7743 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 7744 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 7745 \else % 10 or more: 7746 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 7747 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 7748 }% 7749 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp 7750 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse 7751 \fi 7752 \fi 7753 \fi} 7754 7755 \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax 7756 7757 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 7758 7759 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a 7760 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole 7761 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence 7762 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg). 7763 % 7764 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 7765 \def\braceorlinexxx{% 7766 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else 7767 \expandafter\parsearg 7768 \fi \macnamexxx} 7769 7770 7771 % @alias. 7772 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 7773 % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 7774 % 7775 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 7776 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 7777 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 7778 {% 7779 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 7780 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 7781 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 7782 }% 7783 \next 7784 } 7785 7786 7787 \message{cross references,} 7788 7789 \newwrite\auxfile 7790 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 7791 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 7792 7793 % @inforef is relatively simple. 7794 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 7795 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 7796 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 7797 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 7798 7799 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 7800 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 7801 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 7802 % @node foo , bar , ... 7803 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 7804 % 7805 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 7806 % 7807 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 7808 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 7809 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 7810 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 7811 7812 \let\nwnode=\node 7813 \let\lastnode=\empty 7814 7815 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 7816 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 7817 % 7818 \def\donoderef#1{% 7819 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 7820 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 7821 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 7822 \fi 7823 } 7824 7825 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 7826 % 7827 \newcount\savesfregister 7828 % 7829 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 7830 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 7831 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 7832 7833 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 7834 % anchor), which consists of three parts: 7835 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 7836 % or the anchor name. 7837 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 7838 % empty for anchors. 7839 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 7840 % 7841 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 7842 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 7843 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 7844 % 7845 \def\setref#1#2{% 7846 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 7847 \iflinks 7848 {% 7849 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 7850 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 7851 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 7852 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 7853 }% 7854 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 7855 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 7856 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 7857 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 7858 }% 7859 \fi 7860 } 7861 7862 % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 7863 % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 7864 % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 7865 % variable, now it's official. 7866 % 7867 \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 7868 \def\temp{#1}% 7869 \ifx\temp\onword 7870 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 7871 = \empty 7872 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7873 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 7874 = \relax 7875 \else 7876 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7877 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 7878 must be on|off}% 7879 \fi\fi 7880 } 7881 7882 % 7884 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 7885 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 7886 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 7887 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 7888 % 7889 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7890 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7891 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 7892 % 7893 \newbox\toprefbox 7894 \newbox\printedrefnamebox 7895 \newbox\infofilenamebox 7896 \newbox\printedmanualbox 7897 % 7898 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 7899 \unsepspaces 7900 % 7901 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 7902 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 7903 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 7904 % 7905 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 7906 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 7907 % 7908 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 7909 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 7910 % 7911 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 7912 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 7913 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 7914 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 7915 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 7916 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 7917 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7918 \else 7919 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 7920 % the square brackets if we have it. 7921 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 7922 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 7923 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7924 \else 7925 \ifhavexrefs 7926 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 7927 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 7928 \else 7929 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 7930 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 7931 \fi% 7932 \fi 7933 \fi 7934 \fi 7935 % 7936 % Make link in pdf output. 7937 \ifpdf 7938 {\indexnofonts 7939 \turnoffactive 7940 \makevalueexpandable 7941 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 7942 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 7943 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 7944 \getfilename{#4}% 7945 % 7946 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 7947 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 7948 \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% 7949 \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty 7950 \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets 7951 \else 7952 \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest % escape PDF special chars 7953 \fi 7954 % 7955 \leavevmode 7956 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 7957 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 7958 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% 7959 \else 7960 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% 7961 \fi 7962 }% 7963 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 7964 \fi 7965 % 7966 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 7967 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the 7968 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. 7969 {% 7970 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 7971 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 7972 \indexnofonts 7973 \turnoffactive 7974 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 7975 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 7976 }% 7977 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 7978 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 7979 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 7980 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 7981 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 7982 \else 7983 \printedrefname 7984 \fi 7985 % 7986 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 7987 % "in MANUALNAME". 7988 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 7989 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7990 \fi 7991 \else 7992 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 7993 % 7994 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 7995 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 7996 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 7997 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 7998 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 7999 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8000 % 8001 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8002 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8003 % 8004 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8005 % 8006 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8007 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8008 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8009 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8010 % 8011 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8012 % 8013 \else 8014 % Reference within this manual. 8015 % 8016 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 8017 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 8018 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 8019 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 8020 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 8021 {\turnoffactive 8022 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 8023 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 8024 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 8025 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8026 }% 8027 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8028 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8029 % 8030 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8031 ,\space 8032 % 8033 % output the `page 3'. 8034 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 8035 \fi\fi 8036 \fi 8037 \endlink 8038 \endgroup} 8039 8040 % Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 8041 % 8042 % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 8043 % missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 8044 % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 8045 % 8046 % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 8047 % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 8048 % the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 8049 % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 8050 % in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 8051 % 8052 % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 8053 % reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 8054 % 8055 \def\crossmanualxref#1{% 8056 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 8057 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 8058 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 8059 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 8060 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 8061 \fi 8062 \fi 8063 #1% 8064 } 8065 8066 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 8067 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 8068 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 8069 % one that Bob is working on :). 8070 % 8071 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 8072 8073 % Things referred to by \setref. 8074 % 8075 \def\Ynothing{} 8076 \def\Yomitfromtoc{} 8077 \def\Ynumbered{% 8078 \ifnum\secno=0 8079 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 8080 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 8081 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 8082 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 8083 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 8084 \else 8085 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 8086 \fi\fi\fi 8087 } 8088 \def\Yappendix{% 8089 \ifnum\secno=0 8090 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 8091 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 8092 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 8093 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 8094 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 8095 \else 8096 \putwordSection@tie 8097 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 8098 \fi\fi\fi 8099 } 8100 8101 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 8102 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. 8103 % 8104 \def\refx#1#2{% 8105 {% 8106 \indexnofonts 8107 \otherbackslash 8108 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 8109 \csname XR#1\endcsname 8110 }% 8111 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 8112 % If not defined, say something at least. 8113 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 8114 \iflinks 8115 \ifhavexrefs 8116 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 8117 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 8118 \else 8119 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 8120 \global\warnedxrefstrue 8121 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 8122 \fi 8123 \fi 8124 \fi 8125 \else 8126 % It's defined, so just use it. 8127 \thisrefX 8128 \fi 8129 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 8130 } 8131 8132 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's 8133 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid 8134 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. 8135 % 8136 \def\xrdef#1#2{% 8137 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current 8138 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these 8139 % mess up the control sequence name. 8140 \indexnofonts 8141 \turnoffactive 8142 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 8143 }% 8144 % 8145 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref 8146 % 8147 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 8148 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 8149 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 8150 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 8151 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 8152 % 8153 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 8154 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 8155 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 8156 \else 8157 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 8158 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 8159 \fi 8160 % 8161 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 8162 % for later use in \listoffloats. 8163 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 8164 {\safexrefname}}% 8165 \fi 8166 } 8167 8168 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 8169 % 8170 \def\tryauxfile{% 8171 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 8172 \ifeof 1 \else 8173 \readdatafile{aux}% 8174 \global\havexrefstrue 8175 \fi 8176 \closein 1 8177 } 8178 8179 \def\setupdatafile{% 8180 \catcode`\^^@=\other 8181 \catcode`\^^A=\other 8182 \catcode`\^^B=\other 8183 \catcode`\^^C=\other 8184 \catcode`\^^D=\other 8185 \catcode`\^^E=\other 8186 \catcode`\^^F=\other 8187 \catcode`\^^G=\other 8188 \catcode`\^^H=\other 8189 \catcode`\^^K=\other 8190 \catcode`\^^L=\other 8191 \catcode`\^^N=\other 8192 \catcode`\^^P=\other 8193 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 8194 \catcode`\^^R=\other 8195 \catcode`\^^S=\other 8196 \catcode`\^^T=\other 8197 \catcode`\^^U=\other 8198 \catcode`\^^V=\other 8199 \catcode`\^^W=\other 8200 \catcode`\^^X=\other 8201 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 8202 \catcode`\^^[=\other 8203 \catcode`\^^\=\other 8204 \catcode`\^^]=\other 8205 \catcode`\^^^=\other 8206 \catcode`\^^_=\other 8207 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 8208 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 8209 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 8210 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 8211 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 8212 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 8213 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 8214 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 8215 % 8216 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 8217 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 8218 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 8219 % 8220 \catcode`\^=\other 8221 % 8222 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 8223 \catcode`\~=\other 8224 \catcode`\[=\other 8225 \catcode`\]=\other 8226 \catcode`\"=\other 8227 \catcode`\_=\other 8228 \catcode`\|=\other 8229 \catcode`\<=\other 8230 \catcode`\>=\other 8231 \catcode`\$=\other 8232 \catcode`\#=\other 8233 \catcode`\&=\other 8234 \catcode`\%=\other 8235 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 8236 % 8237 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 8238 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 8239 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 8240 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 8241 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 8242 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 8243 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 8244 \catcode`\\=\other 8245 % 8246 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. 8247 {% 8248 \count1=128 8249 \def\loop{% 8250 \catcode\count1=\other 8251 \advance\count1 by 1 8252 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi 8253 }% 8254 }% 8255 % 8256 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 8257 \catcode`\{=1 8258 \catcode`\}=2 8259 \catcode`\@=0 8260 } 8261 8262 \def\readdatafile#1{% 8263 \begingroup 8264 \setupdatafile 8265 \input\jobname.#1 8266 \endgroup} 8267 8268 8269 \message{insertions,} 8270 % including footnotes. 8271 8272 \newcount \footnoteno 8273 8274 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 8275 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 8276 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 8277 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 8278 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 8279 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 8280 8281 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 8282 \let\footnotestyle=\comment 8283 8284 {\catcode `\@=11 8285 % 8286 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 8287 \gdef\footnote{% 8288 \let\indent=\ptexindent 8289 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 8290 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 8291 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 8292 % 8293 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 8294 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 8295 \let\@sf\empty 8296 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 8297 % 8298 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 8299 \unskip 8300 \thisfootno\@sf 8301 \dofootnote 8302 }% 8303 8304 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 8305 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 8306 % 8307 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 8308 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 8309 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 8310 % 8311 \gdef\dofootnote{% 8312 \insert\footins\bgroup 8313 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 8314 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 8315 % So reset some parameters. 8316 \hsize=\pagewidth 8317 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 8318 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 8319 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 8320 \floatingpenalty\@MM 8321 \leftskip\z@skip 8322 \rightskip\z@skip 8323 \spaceskip\z@skip 8324 \xspaceskip\z@skip 8325 \parindent\defaultparindent 8326 % 8327 \smallfonts \rm 8328 % 8329 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 8330 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 8331 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 8332 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 8333 \let\noindent = \relax 8334 % 8335 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 8336 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 8337 \everypar = {\hang}% 8338 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 8339 % 8340 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 8341 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 8342 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 8343 \footstrut 8344 % 8345 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 8346 \futurelet\next\fo@t 8347 } 8348 }%end \catcode `\@=11 8349 8350 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 8351 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 8352 % would be lost. 8353 % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 8354 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 8355 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 8356 8357 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 8358 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 8359 % out prematurely. 8360 % 8361 \def\startsavinginserts{% 8362 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 8363 \let\insert\saveinsert 8364 \else 8365 \let\checkinserts\relax 8366 \fi 8367 } 8368 8369 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 8370 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 8371 % 8372 \def\saveinsert#1{% 8373 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 8374 \afterassignment\next 8375 % swallow the left brace 8376 \let\temp = 8377 } 8378 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 8379 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 8380 8381 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 8382 8383 \def\placesaveins#1{% 8384 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 8385 {\box#1}% 8386 } 8387 8388 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 8389 { 8390 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 8391 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 8392 } 8393 8394 % initialization: 8395 \def\newsaveins #1{% 8396 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 8397 \next 8398 } 8399 \def\newsaveinsX #1{% 8400 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 8401 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 8402 \checksaveins #1}% 8403 } 8404 8405 % initialize: 8406 \let\checkinserts\empty 8407 \newsaveins\footins 8408 \newsaveins\margin 8409 8410 8411 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 8412 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 8413 % 8414 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 8415 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 8416 % undone and the next image would fail. 8417 \openin 1 = epsf.tex 8418 \ifeof 1 \else 8419 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 8420 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 8421 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 8422 \input epsf.tex 8423 \fi 8424 \closein 1 8425 % 8426 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 8427 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf 8428 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 8429 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 8430 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 8431 % 8432 \def\image#1{% 8433 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 8434 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 8435 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 8436 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 8437 \global\warnednoepsftrue 8438 \fi 8439 \else 8440 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 8441 \fi 8442 } 8443 % 8444 % Arguments to @image: 8445 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 8446 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 8447 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 8448 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 8449 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 8450 \newif\ifimagevmode 8451 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 8452 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 8453 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 8454 % If the image is by itself, center it. 8455 \ifvmode 8456 \imagevmodetrue 8457 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 8458 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 8459 \imagevmodetrue 8460 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 8461 \fi\fi 8462 % 8463 \ifimagevmode 8464 \nobreak\medskip 8465 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 8466 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 8467 % above and below. 8468 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 8469 \nobreak 8470 \fi 8471 % 8472 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 8473 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 8474 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 8475 % normal paragraph indentation. 8476 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 8477 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 8478 % eradicate the centering. 8479 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 8480 % 8481 % Output the image. 8482 \ifpdf 8483 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 8484 \else 8485 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 8486 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 8487 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 8488 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 8489 \fi 8490 % 8491 \ifimagevmode 8492 \medskip % space after a standalone image 8493 \fi 8494 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 8495 \endgroup} 8496 8497 8498 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 8499 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 8500 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 8501 % 8502 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 8503 8504 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 8505 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 8506 8507 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 8508 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 8509 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 8510 % 8511 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 8512 % be referable. 8513 % 8514 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 8515 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 8516 % 8517 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 8518 % chapter-level command. 8519 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 8520 % 8521 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 8522 \let\thiscaption=\empty 8523 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 8524 % 8525 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 8526 % 8527 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 8528 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 8529 % 8530 \startsavinginserts 8531 % 8532 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 8533 \par 8534 % 8535 \vtop\bgroup 8536 \def\floattype{#1}% 8537 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 8538 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 8539 % 8540 \ifx\floattype\empty 8541 \let\safefloattype=\empty 8542 \else 8543 {% 8544 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 8545 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 8546 \indexnofonts 8547 \turnoffactive 8548 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 8549 }% 8550 \fi 8551 % 8552 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 8553 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 8554 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 8555 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 8556 % 8557 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 8558 \global\advance\floatno by 1 8559 % 8560 {% 8561 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 8562 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 8563 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 8564 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 8565 % lists of floats. 8566 % 8567 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 8568 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 8569 }% 8570 \fi 8571 % 8572 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 8573 \vskip\parskip 8574 % 8575 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 8576 \restorefirstparagraphindent 8577 } 8578 8579 % we have these possibilities: 8580 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 8581 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 8582 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 8583 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo 8584 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 8585 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 8586 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 8587 % @float & no caption: 8588 % 8589 \def\Efloat{% 8590 \let\floatident = \empty 8591 % 8592 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 8593 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 8594 % 8595 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 8596 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 8597 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 8598 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 8599 \fi 8600 % the number. 8601 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 8602 \fi 8603 % 8604 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 8605 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 8606 \let\captionline = \floatident 8607 % 8608 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 8609 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 8610 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 8611 \fi 8612 % 8613 % caption text. 8614 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 8615 \fi 8616 % 8617 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 8618 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 8619 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 8620 \vskip.5\parskip 8621 \captionline 8622 % 8623 % Space below caption. 8624 \vskip\parskip 8625 \fi 8626 % 8627 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 8628 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 8629 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 8630 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 8631 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 8632 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 8633 {% 8634 \atdummies 8635 % 8636 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M 8637 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so 8638 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. 8639 \scanexp{% 8640 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% 8641 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 8642 \thiscaption 8643 \else 8644 \thisshortcaption 8645 \fi 8646 }% 8647 }% 8648 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 8649 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 8650 }% 8651 \fi 8652 \egroup % end of \vtop 8653 % 8654 % place the captured inserts 8655 % 8656 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning 8657 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly 8658 % float. --kasal, 26may04 8659 % 8660 \checkinserts 8661 } 8662 8663 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 8664 % 8665 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 8666 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 8667 } 8668 8669 % @caption, @shortcaption 8670 % 8671 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 8672 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 8673 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 8674 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 8675 8676 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 8677 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 8678 \def\getfloatno#1{% 8679 \ifx#1\relax 8680 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 8681 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 8682 % 8683 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 8684 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 8685 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 8686 \fi 8687 \let\floatno#1% 8688 } 8689 8690 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 8691 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 8692 % first read the @float command. 8693 % 8694 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 8695 8696 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 8697 % distinguish floats from other xref types. 8698 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 8699 8700 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 8701 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 8702 % \lastsection value which we \setref above. 8703 % 8704 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 8705 % 8706 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 8707 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 8708 % 8709 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 8710 \def\temp{#1}% 8711 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 8712 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 8713 } 8714 8715 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 8716 % 8717 \parseargdef\listoffloats{% 8718 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 8719 {% 8720 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 8721 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 8722 \indexnofonts 8723 \turnoffactive 8724 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 8725 }% 8726 % 8727 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 8728 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 8729 \ifhavexrefs 8730 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 8731 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 8732 \fi 8733 \else 8734 \begingroup 8735 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 8736 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 8737 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 8738 \endgroup 8739 \fi 8740 } 8741 8742 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 8743 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 8744 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 8745 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 8746 % 8747 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 8748 % they won't appear in the aux file). 8749 % 8750 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 8751 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 8752 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 8753 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 8754 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 8755 % in pdf output. 8756 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 8757 % 8758 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 8759 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 8760 \writeentry 8761 }} 8762 8763 8764 \message{localization,} 8765 8766 % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 8767 % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 8768 % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 8769 % 8770 { 8771 \catcode`\_ = \active 8772 \globaldefs=1 8773 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup 8774 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames 8775 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 8776 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 8777 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 8778 \ifeof 1 8779 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% 8780 \else 8781 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 8782 \input txi-#1.tex 8783 \fi 8784 \closein 1 8785 \endgroup % end raw TeX 8786 \endgroup} 8787 % 8788 % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 8789 % try txi-de.tex. 8790 % 8791 \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 8792 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 8793 \ifeof 1 8794 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 8795 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 8796 \else 8797 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 8798 \input txi-#1.tex 8799 \fi 8800 \closein 1 8801 } 8802 }% end of special _ catcode 8803 % 8804 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 8805 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 8806 directory should work if nowhere else does.} 8807 8808 % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 8809 % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 8810 % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 8811 % 8812 % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 8813 % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 8814 % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 8815 % 8816 % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 8817 % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 8818 % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 8819 % accented characters problem.) 8820 % 8821 \catcode`@=11 8822 \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 8823 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 8824 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 8825 \message{no patterns for #1}% 8826 \else 8827 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 8828 \fi 8829 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 8830 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 8831 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 8832 } 8833 8834 % Helpers for encodings. 8835 % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 8836 % 8837 \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 8838 \count255=128 8839 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 8840 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 8841 \advance\count255 by 1 8842 \repeat 8843 } 8844 8845 \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 8846 \count255=128 8847 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 8848 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 8849 \advance\count255 by 1 8850 \repeat 8851 } 8852 8853 % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 8854 % according to the specified encoding. 8855 % 8856 \parseargdef\documentencoding{% 8857 % Encoding being declared for the document. 8858 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 8859 % 8860 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 8861 % to compare them with \ifx. 8862 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 8863 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 8864 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 8865 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 8866 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 8867 % 8868 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 8869 \asciichardefs 8870 % 8871 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 8872 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8873 \lattwochardefs 8874 % 8875 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 8876 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8877 \latonechardefs 8878 % 8879 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 8880 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8881 \latninechardefs 8882 % 8883 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 8884 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8885 \utfeightchardefs 8886 % 8887 \else 8888 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% 8889 % 8890 \fi % utfeight 8891 \fi % latnine 8892 \fi % latone 8893 \fi % lattwo 8894 \fi % ascii 8895 } 8896 8897 % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 8898 % the default font encoding (OT1). 8899 % 8900 \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} 8901 8902 % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 8903 \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 8904 8905 % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 8906 % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 8907 % macros containing the character definitions. 8908 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 8909 % 8910 % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 8911 \def\latonechardefs{% 8912 \gdef^^a0{\tie} 8913 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} 8914 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} 8915 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} 8916 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 8917 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} 8918 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} 8919 \gdef^^a7{\S} 8920 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 8921 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} 8922 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} 8923 \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft} 8924 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} 8925 \gdef^^ad{\-} 8926 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} 8927 \gdef^^af{\={}} 8928 % 8929 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 8930 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} 8931 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} 8932 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} 8933 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 8934 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} 8935 \gdef^^b6{\P} 8936 % 8937 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} 8938 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 8939 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} 8940 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} 8941 % 8942 \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright} 8943 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} 8944 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} 8945 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} 8946 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} 8947 % 8948 \gdef^^c0{\`A} 8949 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 8950 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 8951 \gdef^^c3{\~A} 8952 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 8953 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} 8954 \gdef^^c6{\AE} 8955 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 8956 \gdef^^c8{\`E} 8957 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 8958 \gdef^^ca{\^E} 8959 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 8960 \gdef^^cc{\`I} 8961 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 8962 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 8963 \gdef^^cf{\"I} 8964 % 8965 \gdef^^d0{\DH} 8966 \gdef^^d1{\~N} 8967 \gdef^^d2{\`O} 8968 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 8969 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 8970 \gdef^^d5{\~O} 8971 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 8972 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 8973 \gdef^^d8{\O} 8974 \gdef^^d9{\`U} 8975 \gdef^^da{\'U} 8976 \gdef^^db{\^U} 8977 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 8978 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 8979 \gdef^^de{\TH} 8980 \gdef^^df{\ss} 8981 % 8982 \gdef^^e0{\`a} 8983 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 8984 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 8985 \gdef^^e3{\~a} 8986 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 8987 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} 8988 \gdef^^e6{\ae} 8989 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 8990 \gdef^^e8{\`e} 8991 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 8992 \gdef^^ea{\^e} 8993 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 8994 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 8995 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 8996 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 8997 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 8998 % 8999 \gdef^^f0{\dh} 9000 \gdef^^f1{\~n} 9001 \gdef^^f2{\`o} 9002 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 9003 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 9004 \gdef^^f5{\~o} 9005 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 9006 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 9007 \gdef^^f8{\o} 9008 \gdef^^f9{\`u} 9009 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 9010 \gdef^^fb{\^u} 9011 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 9012 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 9013 \gdef^^fe{\th} 9014 \gdef^^ff{\"y} 9015 } 9016 9017 % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 9018 \def\latninechardefs{% 9019 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 9020 \latonechardefs 9021 % 9022 \gdef^^a4{\euro} 9023 \gdef^^a6{\v S} 9024 \gdef^^a8{\v s} 9025 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} 9026 \gdef^^b8{\v z} 9027 \gdef^^bc{\OE} 9028 \gdef^^bd{\oe} 9029 \gdef^^be{\"Y} 9030 } 9031 9032 % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 9033 \def\lattwochardefs{% 9034 \gdef^^a0{\tie} 9035 \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 9036 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} 9037 \gdef^^a3{\L} 9038 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 9039 \gdef^^a5{\v L} 9040 \gdef^^a6{\'S} 9041 \gdef^^a7{\S} 9042 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 9043 \gdef^^a9{\v S} 9044 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} 9045 \gdef^^ab{\v T} 9046 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} 9047 \gdef^^ad{\-} 9048 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} 9049 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} 9050 % 9051 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 9052 \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 9053 \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 9054 \gdef^^b3{\l} 9055 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 9056 \gdef^^b5{\v l} 9057 \gdef^^b6{\'s} 9058 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} 9059 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 9060 \gdef^^b9{\v s} 9061 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} 9062 \gdef^^bb{\v t} 9063 \gdef^^bc{\'z} 9064 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} 9065 \gdef^^be{\v z} 9066 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} 9067 % 9068 \gdef^^c0{\'R} 9069 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 9070 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 9071 \gdef^^c3{\u A} 9072 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 9073 \gdef^^c5{\'L} 9074 \gdef^^c6{\'C} 9075 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 9076 \gdef^^c8{\v C} 9077 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 9078 \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 9079 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 9080 \gdef^^cc{\v E} 9081 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 9082 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 9083 \gdef^^cf{\v D} 9084 % 9085 \gdef^^d0{\DH} 9086 \gdef^^d1{\'N} 9087 \gdef^^d2{\v N} 9088 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 9089 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 9090 \gdef^^d5{\H O} 9091 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 9092 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 9093 \gdef^^d8{\v R} 9094 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} 9095 \gdef^^da{\'U} 9096 \gdef^^db{\H U} 9097 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 9098 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 9099 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} 9100 \gdef^^df{\ss} 9101 % 9102 \gdef^^e0{\'r} 9103 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 9104 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 9105 \gdef^^e3{\u a} 9106 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 9107 \gdef^^e5{\'l} 9108 \gdef^^e6{\'c} 9109 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 9110 \gdef^^e8{\v c} 9111 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 9112 \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 9113 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 9114 \gdef^^ec{\v e} 9115 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 9116 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 9117 \gdef^^ef{\v d} 9118 % 9119 \gdef^^f0{\dh} 9120 \gdef^^f1{\'n} 9121 \gdef^^f2{\v n} 9122 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 9123 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 9124 \gdef^^f5{\H o} 9125 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 9126 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 9127 \gdef^^f8{\v r} 9128 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} 9129 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 9130 \gdef^^fb{\H u} 9131 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 9132 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 9133 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} 9134 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 9135 } 9136 9137 % UTF-8 character definitions. 9138 % 9139 % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 9140 % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 9141 % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 9142 % 9143 \newcount\countUTFx 9144 \newcount\countUTFy 9145 \newcount\countUTFz 9146 9147 \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 9148 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 9149 % 9150 \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 9151 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 9152 % 9153 \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 9154 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 9155 9156 \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 9157 \ifx #1\relax 9158 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 9159 \else 9160 \expandafter #1% 9161 \fi 9162 } 9163 9164 \begingroup 9165 \catcode`\~13 9166 \catcode`\"12 9167 9168 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 9169 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 9170 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 9171 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 9172 \advance\countUTFx by 1 9173 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 9174 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 9175 \fi} 9176 9177 \countUTFx = "C2 9178 \countUTFy = "E0 9179 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 9180 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} 9181 \UTFviiiLoop 9182 9183 \countUTFx = "E0 9184 \countUTFy = "F0 9185 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 9186 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} 9187 \UTFviiiLoop 9188 9189 \countUTFx = "F0 9190 \countUTFy = "F4 9191 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 9192 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} 9193 \UTFviiiLoop 9194 \endgroup 9195 9196 \begingroup 9197 \catcode`\"=12 9198 \catcode`\<=12 9199 \catcode`\.=12 9200 \catcode`\,=12 9201 \catcode`\;=12 9202 \catcode`\!=12 9203 \catcode`\~=13 9204 9205 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% 9206 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 9207 %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% 9208 \begingroup 9209 \parseXMLCharref 9210 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% 9211 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% 9212 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% 9213 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% 9214 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% 9215 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% 9216 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 9217 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 9218 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 9219 \endgroup} 9220 9221 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 9222 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 9223 \errhelp = \EMsimple 9224 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 9225 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 9226 \parseUTFviiiA,% 9227 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% 9228 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 9229 \parseUTFviiiA;% 9230 \parseUTFviiiA,% 9231 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% 9232 \else 9233 \parseUTFviiiA;% 9234 \parseUTFviiiA,% 9235 \parseUTFviiiA!% 9236 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% 9237 \fi\fi\fi 9238 } 9239 9240 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 9241 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 9242 \divide\countUTFz by 64 9243 \countUTFy = \countUTFz 9244 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 9245 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 9246 \advance\countUTFx by 128 9247 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 9248 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 9249 9250 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 9251 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 9252 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 9253 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 9254 \endgroup 9255 9256 \def\utfeightchardefs{% 9257 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} 9258 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} 9259 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} 9260 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} 9261 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} 9262 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} 9263 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} 9264 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} 9265 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} 9266 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} 9267 9268 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} 9269 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} 9270 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} 9271 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} 9272 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} 9273 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} 9274 9275 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} 9276 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} 9277 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} 9278 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} 9279 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} 9280 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} 9281 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} 9282 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} 9283 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} 9284 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} 9285 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} 9286 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} 9287 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} 9288 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} 9289 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} 9290 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} 9291 9292 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH} 9293 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} 9294 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} 9295 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} 9296 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} 9297 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} 9298 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} 9299 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} 9300 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} 9301 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} 9302 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} 9303 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} 9304 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} 9305 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH} 9306 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} 9307 9308 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} 9309 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} 9310 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} 9311 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} 9312 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} 9313 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} 9314 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} 9315 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} 9316 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} 9317 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} 9318 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} 9319 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} 9320 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} 9321 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} 9322 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} 9323 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} 9324 9325 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh} 9326 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} 9327 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} 9328 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} 9329 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} 9330 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} 9331 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} 9332 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} 9333 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} 9334 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} 9335 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} 9336 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} 9337 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} 9338 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th} 9339 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} 9340 9341 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} 9342 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} 9343 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} 9344 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} 9345 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}} 9346 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}} 9347 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} 9348 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} 9349 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} 9350 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} 9351 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}} 9352 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}} 9353 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} 9354 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} 9355 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} 9356 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} 9357 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} 9358 9359 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} 9360 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} 9361 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} 9362 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} 9363 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} 9364 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} 9365 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} 9366 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} 9367 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} 9368 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} 9369 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} 9370 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} 9371 9372 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} 9373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} 9374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} 9375 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} 9376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} 9377 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} 9378 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} 9379 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} 9380 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} 9381 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} 9382 9383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} 9384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} 9385 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} 9386 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} 9387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} 9388 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} 9389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} 9390 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} 9391 9392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} 9393 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} 9394 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} 9395 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} 9396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} 9397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} 9398 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} 9399 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} 9400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} 9401 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} 9402 9403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} 9404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} 9405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} 9406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} 9407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} 9408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} 9409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} 9410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} 9411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} 9412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} 9413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} 9414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} 9415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} 9416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} 9417 9418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} 9419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} 9420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} 9421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} 9422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} 9423 9424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} 9425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} 9426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} 9427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} 9428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} 9429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} 9430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} 9431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} 9432 9433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} 9434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} 9435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} 9436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} 9437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} 9438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} 9439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} 9440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} 9441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} 9442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} 9443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} 9444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} 9445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} 9446 9447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} 9448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} 9449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} 9450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} 9451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} 9452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} 9453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} 9454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} 9455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} 9456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} 9457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} 9458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} 9459 9460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} 9461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} 9462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} 9463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} 9464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} 9465 9466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} 9467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} 9468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} 9469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} 9470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} 9471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} 9472 9473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} 9474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} 9475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} 9476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} 9477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} 9478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} 9479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} 9480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} 9481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} 9482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} 9483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} 9484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} 9485 9486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} 9487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} 9488 9489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} 9490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} 9491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} 9492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} 9493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} 9494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} 9495 9496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} 9497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} 9498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} 9499 9500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }} 9501 9502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} 9503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} 9504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} 9505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} 9506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} 9507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} 9508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} 9509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} 9510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} 9511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} 9512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} 9513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} 9514 9515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} 9516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} 9517 9518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} 9519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} 9520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} 9521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} 9522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} 9523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} 9524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} 9525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} 9526 9527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} 9528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} 9529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} 9530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} 9531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} 9532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} 9533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} 9534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} 9535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} 9536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} 9537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} 9538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} 9539 9540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} 9541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} 9542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} 9543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} 9544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} 9545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} 9546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} 9547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} 9548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} 9549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} 9550 9551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} 9552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} 9553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} 9554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} 9555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} 9556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} 9557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} 9558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} 9559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} 9560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} 9561 9562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} 9563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} 9564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} 9565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} 9566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} 9567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} 9568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} 9569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} 9570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} 9571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} 9572 9573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} 9574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} 9575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} 9576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} 9577 9578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} 9579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} 9580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} 9581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} 9582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} 9583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} 9584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} 9585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} 9586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} 9587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} 9588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} 9589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} 9590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} 9591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} 9592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} 9593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} 9594 9595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} 9596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} 9597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} 9598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} 9599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} 9600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} 9601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} 9602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} 9603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} 9604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} 9605 9606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} 9607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} 9608 9609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} 9610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} 9611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} 9612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} 9613 9614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} 9615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} 9616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} 9617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} 9618 9619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} 9620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} 9621 9622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} 9623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} 9624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} 9625 9626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} 9627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} 9628 9629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} 9630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} 9631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} 9632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} 9633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} 9634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} 9635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} 9636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} 9637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} 9638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} 9639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} 9640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} 9641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} 9642 9643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} 9644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} 9645 9646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} 9647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} 9648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} 9649 }% end of \utfeightchardefs 9650 9651 9652 % US-ASCII character definitions. 9653 \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 9654 \relax 9655 } 9656 9657 % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 9658 % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 9659 % document encoding. 9660 % 9661 \setnonasciicharscatcode \other 9662 9663 9664 \message{formatting,} 9665 9666 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 9667 9668 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 9669 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 9670 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 9671 9672 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 9673 \vbadness = 10000 9674 9675 % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 9676 \hbadness = 6666 9677 9678 % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 9679 \widowpenalty=10000 9680 \clubpenalty=10000 9681 9682 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 9683 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 9684 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 9685 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 9686 % 9687 \def\setemergencystretch{% 9688 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 9689 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 9690 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 9691 \else 9692 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 9693 \fi 9694 } 9695 9696 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 9697 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 9698 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 9699 % 9700 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 9701 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 9702 % 9703 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 9704 \voffset = #3\relax 9705 \topskip = #6\relax 9706 \splittopskip = \topskip 9707 % 9708 \vsize = #1\relax 9709 \advance\vsize by \topskip 9710 \outervsize = \vsize 9711 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 9712 \pageheight = \vsize 9713 % 9714 \hsize = #2\relax 9715 \outerhsize = \hsize 9716 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 9717 \pagewidth = \hsize 9718 % 9719 \normaloffset = #4\relax 9720 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 9721 % 9722 \ifpdf 9723 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 9724 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 9725 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 9726 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 9727 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 9728 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 9729 \fi 9730 % 9731 \setleading{\textleading} 9732 % 9733 \parindent = \defaultparindent 9734 \setemergencystretch 9735 } 9736 9737 % @letterpaper (the default). 9738 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9739 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9740 \textleading = 13.2pt 9741 % 9742 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 9743 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 9744 {\voffset}{.25in}% 9745 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 9746 {11in}{8.5in}% 9747 }} 9748 9749 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 9750 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 9751 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 9752 \textleading = 12pt 9753 % 9754 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 9755 {-.2in}{0in}% 9756 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 9757 {9.25in}{7in}% 9758 % 9759 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 9760 \tolerance = 700 9761 \hfuzz = 1pt 9762 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9763 \defbodyindent = .5cm 9764 }} 9765 9766 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 9767 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 9768 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 9769 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 9770 \textleading = 12pt 9771 % 9772 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 9773 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 9774 {0pt}{14pt}% 9775 {9in}{6in}% 9776 % 9777 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 9778 \tolerance = 700 9779 \hfuzz = 1pt 9780 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9781 \defbodyindent = .4cm 9782 }} 9783 9784 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 9785 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9786 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9787 \textleading = 13.2pt 9788 % 9789 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 9790 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 9791 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 9792 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 9793 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 9794 % your texinfo source file like this: 9795 % @tex 9796 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 9797 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 9798 % @end tex 9799 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 9800 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 9801 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 9802 {297mm}{210mm}% 9803 % 9804 \tolerance = 700 9805 \hfuzz = 1pt 9806 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9807 \defbodyindent = 5mm 9808 }} 9809 9810 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 9811 % From romildo (a] urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 9812 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 9813 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 9814 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 9815 \textleading = 12.5pt 9816 % 9817 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 9818 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 9819 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 9820 {210mm}{148mm}% 9821 % 9822 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 9823 \tolerance = 800 9824 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 9825 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 9826 \defbodyindent = 2mm 9827 \tableindent = 12mm 9828 }} 9829 9830 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 9831 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 9832 \afourpaper 9833 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 9834 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 9835 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 9836 {297mm}{210mm}% 9837 % 9838 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 9839 \globaldefs = 0 9840 }} 9841 9842 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 9843 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 9844 \afourpaper 9845 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 9846 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 9847 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 9848 {297mm}{210mm}% 9849 \globaldefs = 0 9850 }} 9851 9852 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 9853 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 9854 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 9855 % 9856 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 9857 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 9858 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 9859 \globaldefs = 1 9860 % 9861 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 9862 \setleading{\textleading}% 9863 % 9864 \dimen0 = #1\relax 9865 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 9866 % 9867 \dimen2 = \hsize 9868 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 9869 % 9870 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 9871 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 9872 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 9873 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 9874 }} 9875 9876 % Set default to letter. 9877 % 9878 \letterpaper 9879 9880 9881 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 9882 9883 \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 9884 9885 % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 9886 \catcode`\^^? = 14 9887 9888 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 9889 \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 9890 \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 9891 \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 9892 \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 9893 \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 9894 \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 9895 \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 9896 \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 9897 \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 9898 9899 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 9900 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 9901 % where something hairier probably needs to be done. 9902 % 9903 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 9904 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 9905 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 9906 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 9907 % 9908 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 9909 9910 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 9911 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 9912 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 9913 % this is not a problem. 9914 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 9915 9916 % Turn off all special characters except @ 9917 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). 9918 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 9919 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 9920 9921 \catcode`\"=\active 9922 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 9923 \let"=\activedoublequote 9924 \catcode`\~=\active 9925 \def~{{\tt\char126}} 9926 \chardef\hat=`\^ 9927 \catcode`\^=\active 9928 \def^{{\tt \hat}} 9929 9930 \catcode`\_=\active 9931 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 9932 \let\realunder=_ 9933 % Subroutine for the previous macro. 9934 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 9935 9936 \catcode`\|=\active 9937 \def|{{\tt\char124}} 9938 \chardef \less=`\< 9939 \catcode`\<=\active 9940 \def<{{\tt \less}} 9941 \chardef \gtr=`\> 9942 \catcode`\>=\active 9943 \def>{{\tt \gtr}} 9944 \catcode`\+=\active 9945 \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 9946 \catcode`\$=\active 9947 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 9948 9949 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 9950 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 9951 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. 9952 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. 9953 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} 9954 9955 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 9956 % parsing them. 9957 \def\turnoffactive{% 9958 \normalturnoffactive 9959 \otherbackslash 9960 } 9961 9962 \catcode`\@=0 9963 9964 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 9965 % as in \char`\\. 9966 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 9967 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 9968 9969 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 9970 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 9971 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 9972 9973 % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 9974 % in fixed width font. 9975 \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 9976 9977 % The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont 9978 % ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char 9979 % in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets 9980 % \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always 9981 % print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 9982 % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 9983 % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 9984 % usual hex value because it has already been made active. 9985 @def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 9986 @let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 9987 9988 % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: 9989 % @let \ = @normalbackslash 9990 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 9991 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 9992 % catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. 9993 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 9994 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 9995 9996 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 9997 % the literal character `\'. Also revert - to its normal character, in 9998 % case the active - from code has slipped in. 9999 % 10000 {@catcode`- = @active 10001 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 10002 @let-=@normaldash 10003 @let"=@normaldoublequote 10004 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 10005 @let+=@normalplus 10006 @let<=@normalless 10007 @let>=@normalgreater 10008 @let\=@normalbackslash 10009 @let^=@normalcaret 10010 @let_=@normalunderscore 10011 @let|=@normalverticalbar 10012 @let~=@normaltilde 10013 @markupsetuplqdefault 10014 @markupsetuprqdefault 10015 @unsepspaces 10016 } 10017 } 10018 10019 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. 10020 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. 10021 @otherifyactive 10022 10023 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 10024 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 10025 % a backslash. 10026 % 10027 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} 10028 @global@let\ = @eatinput 10029 10030 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then 10031 % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix 10032 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. 10033 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 10034 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 10035 % 10036 @gdef@fixbackslash{% 10037 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi 10038 @catcode`+=@active 10039 @catcode`@_=@active 10040 } 10041 10042 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 10043 @escapechar = `@@ 10044 10045 % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 10046 % active definitions as the normal characters. 10047 @def@normaldot{.} 10048 @def@normalquest{?} 10049 @def@normalslash{/} 10050 10051 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 10052 % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 10053 @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 10054 @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 10055 @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 10056 10057 @let @hashchar = @normalhash 10058 10059 @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 10060 @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 10061 @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 10062 @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 10063 @catcode`@'=@active 10064 @catcode`@`=@active 10065 @markupsetuplqdefault 10066 @markupsetuprqdefault 10067 10068 @c Local variables: 10069 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 10070 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" 10071 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 10072 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 10073 @c time-stamp-end: "}" 10074 @c End: 10075 10076 @c vim:sw=2: 10077 10078 @ignore 10079 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 10080 @end ignore 10081
